Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf

223 excerpts.

Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 1 · Applies to: 453

Manuals / Brands / SMART Manuals / Automobile / 2016 fortwo / Operator's manual / PDF SMART 2016 FORTWO OPERATOR'S MANUAL Quick Links Instrument Cluster

Table of Contents

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 2 · Applies to: 453

Table of Contents Introduction Function Important safety notes Diagnostics connection Customer Relations Department Copyright instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Control panel Safety lamps Seat belt occupant safety Fastening Important safety notes Knee bag Window curtain air bag System self-test Deployment Operation

Children in the vehicle

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 3 · Applies to: 453

Special seat belt retractor Top Tether On the front-passenger seat Immobilizer Important safety notes Distance warning function Characteristics Crosswind Assist Important safety notes Replacing Loss Important safety notes Emergency locking cargo compartment side windows Side windows Resetting Operating the roller sunblind Important safety notes Folding down Seat heating problem exterior mirrors Automatic headlamp mode Fog lamps Hazard warning lamps Changing bulbs replacing bulbs

Front fog lamp

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 4 · Applies to: 453

Brake lamps Replacing Intermittent wiping windshield wipers Climate control Climate control Automatic climate control Switching on/off Defrosting the windshield Air vents Important safety notes Setting the center air vents Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Pulling away Gear lever Drive program display Changing gear Drive program automatic transmission lever lock Fuel filler flap Opening Parking Parking brake Drinking and driving Important safety notes Maintenance Driving systems Activating

Deactivating

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 5 · Applies to: 453

Overview Fuel gauge Color Distance recorder Temperature display Settings menu Adjusting Setting the temperature unit lighting submenu display messages Safety systems Display message Display message Driving systems Display message SmartKey Warning lamp Warning lamp Indicator lamp Warning lamp Check Engine Warning and indicator lamps Warning lamp Warning lamp Warning lamp Loading guidelines Glove box

stowage areas

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 6 · Applies to: 453

Fitting/removing Center console Ashtray Floormats Engine compartment cover Adding Service cover Important safety notes General notes Car wash Matte finish Panoramic roof Display Gear or selector lever Carpets Flat tire Preparing the vehicle flat tire Important safety notes Charging Jump starting Important safety notes SmartKey Emergency engine starting Before changing Allocation Wheels and tires

Checking

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 7 · Applies to: 453

Snow chains Recommended Notes Maximum Important safety notes Warning message Loading loading the vehicle Standards Temperature Labeling (overview) ber (TIN) Characteristics Changing a wheel Preparing the vehicle Mounting a new wheel General notes Overview Wheel and tire combination wheel and tire combinations Technical data Vehicle identification plate Engine number Important safety notes Additives Additives Notes

Refrigerant

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 8 · Applies to: 453

Vehicle data Other ManualsLib Projects

>> Operator's Manual

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 9 · Applies to: 453

smart fortwo É4535841703SËÍ 4535841703 Order no. 65220156 13 Part no. 453 584 17 03 Edition A-2016 www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand smart fortwo Operator's Manual Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Publication details

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 10 · Applies to: 453

Internet Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the follow- ing websites: http://www.smart.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany Symbols In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. X Several of these symbols in succes- sion indicate an instruction with several steps. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic. YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page. Dis‐ play This text indicates a message on the multifunction display. As at 10.04.2015 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Let the fun begin!

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 11 · Applies to: 453

We urge you to read it carefully and famili- arize yourself with the vehicle before driv- ing. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. This Operator's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehi- cle. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and con- trols differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. smart therefore reserves the right to intro- duce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. 4535841703 É4535841703SËÍ Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Index ............................................ 3

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 12 · Applies to: 453

Introduction ................................. 16 At a glance ................................... 22 Safety .......................................... 29 Opening and closing ....................... 51 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ...... 61 Lights and windshield wipers ........... 67 Climate control ............................. 79 Driving and parking ....................... 86 On-board computer and displays ...... 109 Stowage and features ..................... 142 Maintenance and care .................... 149 Breakdown assistance .................... 161 Wheels and tires ........................... 177 Technical data ............................. 204 2 Contents Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12 V socket

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 13 · Applies to: 453

1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ....................... 121 Function/notes .......................... 47 Important safety notes ................ 47 Warning lamp .......................... 134 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ............... 81 Additives (engine oil) ................... 209 Air bags Deployment .............................. 40 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ............................... 35 Important safety notes ................ 34 Introduction ............................ 34 Knee bag .................................. 35 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ...................................... 36 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ...................................... 30 Window curtain air bag ............... 36 Air pressure see Tire pressure Air vents Important safety notes ................ 84 Setting ................................... 84 Setting the center air vents ......... 85 Setting the side air vents ........... 85 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Thorax/pelvisbag ...................... 35 Warning lamp .......................... 132 Alarm Anti-theft alarm system .............. 46 Switching off ............................ 47 Switching the function on/off ...... 46 Ambient lighting Setting the brightness ............... 116 Switching on/off ...................... 116 Animals see Pets in the vehicle Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system Function .................................. 46 Switching off the alarm .............. 47 Switching on/off ....................... 46 Ashtray ....................................... 147 Assistance system see Driving systems Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic car wash (care) ............... 155 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 67 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ......... 93 Changing gear .......................... 93 Display message (color display) .. 128 Drive program .......................... 94 Drive program display ................ 92 Driving tips ............................. 93 Emergency running mode ............. 97 Gearshift paddles ...................... 96 Kickdown ................................. 94 Malfunction (on-board computer with color display) ................... 128 Manual shifting ........................ 94 Manually releasing the selector lever lock ................................ 97 Overview ................................. 92 Problem (malfunction) ................ 97 Program selector button .............. 94 Pulling away ............................. 88 Selector lever .......................... 92 Starting the engine ................... 88 Transmission position display ..... 92 Transmission positions .............. 93 Automatic transmission emergency mode ............................................ 97 B Backup lamp Changing bulbs ......................... 73 Battery (SmartKey) Important safety notes ................ 52 Replacing ................................ 52 Index 3 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Battery (vehicle)

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 14 · Applies to: 453

Charging ................................ 166 Display message ...................... 124 Important safety notes ............... 164 Jump starting .......................... 168 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 137 Belt see Seat belts Blower see Climate control Brake fluid Display message ...................... 120 Notes ..................................... 210 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Changing bulbs ......................... 73 Display message ....................... 128 Brake lights Display message (color display) .. 128 Brakes ABS ......................................... 47 Brake fluid (notes) ................... 210 EBD ........................................ 50 Important safety notes ............... 103 Maintenance ............................ 104 Parking brake .......................... 101 Riding tips ............................. 103 Warning lamp .......................... 132 Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Replacing bulbs C Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Car key see SmartKey Car wash see Care Care Car wash ................................. 155 Carpets .................................. 160 Display .................................. 158 Exhaust pipe ........................... 158 Exterior lights ........................ 158 Gear or selector lever ............... 159 General notes .......................... 154 Interior ................................. 158 Matte finish ............................ 156 Paint ..................................... 156 Panoramic roof ........................ 157 Plastic trim ............................ 158 Power washer ........................... 155 Roof lining ............................. 160 Seat belt ................................ 159 Seat cover ............................... 159 Sensors .................................. 158 Steering wheel ......................... 159 Washing by hand ....................... 155 Wheels ................................... 157 Windows ................................. 157 Wiper blades ........................... 157 Center console .............................. 26 Central locking Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 51 Changing bulbs Brake lamps .............................. 73 Front fog lamp .......................... 72 High-beam headlamps ................. 72 Low-beam headlamps .................. 72 Rear fog lamp ........................... 73 Reversing lamps ........................ 73 Tail lamps ............................... 73 Turn signals (front) ................... 72 Turn signals (rear) .................... 73 Child seat Forward-facing restraint sys- tem ......................................... 45 On the front-passenger seat ......... 45 Rearward-facing restraint sys- tem ......................................... 45 Top Tether ............................... 44 Children Restraint systems ...................... 43 Special seat belt retractor .......... 43 Cleaning see Care Climate control Automatic climate control ........... 80 4 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Controlling automatically ........... 81

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 15 · Applies to: 453

Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion ........................................ 81 Defrosting the windows ............... 82 Defrosting the windshield ........... 82 General notes ........................... 79 Notes on using the automatic climate control ......................... 80 Overview of systems ................... 79 Problem with the rear window defroster ................................. 84 Refrigerant ............................. 211 Setting the air distribution ........ 81 Setting the air vents .................. 84 Setting the airflow .................... 82 Setting the temperature .............. 81 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off .............................. 84 Switching on/off ....................... 80 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ........................ 82 Cockpit Overview ................................. 22 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime running lamps Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .................................... 112 Controlling speed see Cruise control Coolant Battery cooling system .............. 153 Checking the level .................... 153 Drive system cooling system ....... 153 General notes .......................... 210 Important safety notes ............... 153 Setting the temperature unit ...... 116 Temperature display ................. 113 Topping up ............................. 153 Warning lamp .......................... 138 Coolant (engine) Display message ....................... 125 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ..................................... 21 Cover (front) see Service cover Crosswind Assist ............................ 50 Cruise control Activating .............................. 106 Buttons .................................. 106 Calling up the speed last stored .. 106 Canceling cruise control ........... 107 Deactivating ........................... 107 Display message (color display) .. 126 Driving systems ....................... 105 Function/notes ........................ 105 General notes .......................... 105 Important safety notes ............... 105 Increasing/decreasing the speed ..................................... 106 Storing and maintaining cur- rent speed .............................. 106 Cup holder Center console ......................... 146 Center console in the rear com- partment ................................ 146 Important safety notes ............... 146 Cup holder see Cup holder Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ...... 20 Customer Relations Department ......... 20 D Dashboard Additional instruments ............. 110 Dashboard see Cockpit Dashboard clock ............................ 110 Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Function/notes .......................... 67 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity .............. 19 Diagnostics connection ................... 19 Digital speedometer Display .................................. 109 Setting the display ................... 115 Display Color ..................................... 111 Menu (on-board computer with a color display) .......................... 115 Display (cleaning instructions) ....... 158 Index 5 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display message

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 16 · Applies to: 453

Calling up (message memory) ....... 113 Color display .......................... 118 Language setting ...................... 117 Service display ....................... 153 Display messages Calling up (on-board computer) ... 113 Driving systems ....................... 126 Engine ................................... 124 General notes (on-board com- puter with a color display) ......... 118 Hiding ................................... 118 Lights .................................... 128 Safety systems ......................... 119 SmartKey ................................ 130 Tires ..................................... 126 Vehicle .................................. 128 Distance recorder ......................... 112 Distance warning function Function/notes ......................... 48 Warning lamp (red) ................... 136 Warning lamp (yellow) ............... 135 Door Warning lamp ........................... 141 Doors Automatic locking (switch) .......... 55 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ................................ 51 Control panel ........................... 28 Display message ....................... 128 Emergency locking ..................... 55 Emergency unlocking .................. 55 Important safety notes ................ 54 Opening (from inside) ................ 54 Drinking and driving ..................... 102 Drive program Automatic transmission .............. 94 Display ................................... 92 Driver's door see Doors Driver's seat see Seats Driving abroad smart service .......................... 154 Driving on flooded roads ................ 104 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 47 Distance warning function .......... 48 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ........................... 50 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ...................................... 49 ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ........................................ 49 Important safety information ....... 47 Overview ................................. 47 Driving system Parking aid ............................. 107 Driving systems Cruise control ......................... 105 Display message ....................... 126 Driving tips Automatic transmission .............. 93 Brakes ................................... 103 Break-in period ........................ 86 Downhill gradient .................... 103 Drinking and driving ................ 102 Driving in winter ..................... 105 Driving on flooded roads ........... 104 Driving on wet roads ................. 104 Exhaust check .......................... 103 Fuel ...................................... 102 General .................................. 102 Hydroplaning .......................... 104 Icy road surfaces ..................... 105 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ............................ 104 Snow chains ............................. 179 Subjecting brakes to a load ........ 103 Wet road surface ...................... 103 E EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) Display message ...................... 120 Function/notes ......................... 50 EBD (Electronic Brake-force Dis- tribution) Indicator lamp ........................ 133 Electronic Brake-force Distribu- tion see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Electronic Traction System see ETS (Electronic Traction System) 6 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Emergency release

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 17 · Applies to: 453

Driver's door ............................ 55 Vehicle ................................... 55 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ............................... 40 Emissions control Service and warranty informa- tion ........................................ 17 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........ 136 Display message ...................... 124 Engine number ......................... 206 Irregular running ...................... 90 Jump-starting ......................... 168 Starting problems ..................... 90 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ................................. 88 Switching off ........................... 101 Tow-starting (vehicle) .............. 172 Engine compartment cover .............. 149 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................ 90 Engine oil Adding ................................... 150 Additives ............................... 209 Checking the oil level ............... 150 Display message ...................... 124 Filling capacity ...................... 209 Notes about oil grades .............. 209 Notes on oil level/consumption ... 149 Viscosity ............................... 210 Warning lamp .......................... 138 Engine oil additives see Additives (engine oil) ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Characteristics ........................ 49 Crosswind Assist ....................... 50 Display message ....................... 121 ETS ......................................... 49 Function/notes ......................... 49 General notes ........................... 49 Important safety information ....... 49 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 134 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...... 49 Exhaust check .............................. 103 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- tions) ......................................... 158 Exterior lighting Cleaning ................................ 158 Setting options ......................... 67 Exterior mirrors Adjusting (electrically) ............. 66 Adjusting (manually) .................. 66 Out of position (troubleshoot- ing) ........................................ 66 F Filler cap see Refueling Filling capacities (Technical data) .. 207 Flat tire Preparing the vehicle ............... 161 TIREFIT kit ............................. 161 Floormats .................................... 148 Fog lamps Switching on/off ....................... 68 Frequencies Mobile phone .......................... 204 Two-way radio ......................... 204 Front cover see Service cover Front fog lamps Changing bulbs ......................... 72 Switching on/off ....................... 68 Front-passenger seat Folding down ............................ 63 Frontal area cover see Service cover Fuel Additives ............................... 208 Consumption information .......... 209 Displaying the current con- sumption ................................ 112 Driving tips ........................... 102 Fuel gauge .............................. 110 Grade (gasoline) ...................... 208 Important safety notes .............. 207 Problem (malfunction) ............... 100 Refueling ................................ 97 Tank content/reserve fuel .......... 207 Fuel filler flap Opening .................................. 98 Fuel tank Capacity ................................ 207 Index 7 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem (malfunction) ............... 100

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 18 · Applies to: 453

Fuses Allocation .............................. 175 Before changing ....................... 173 Dashboard fuse box ................... 173 Fuse box in the front area .......... 173 Important safety notes ............... 173 Fuses see Fuses G Gasoline ..................................... 208 Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) ................................. 159 Genuine parts ................................ 16 Glove box .................................... 143 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hands-free system see Mobile phone Hazard warning lamps ...................... 69 Headlamps Fogging up ............................... 69 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High beam flasher .......................... 69 High-beam headlamps Changing bulbs ......................... 72 Switching on/off ....................... 69 Hill start assist ............................ 88 Hydroplaning ............................... 104 I Ignition key see SmartKey Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer ................................. 46 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Overview ................................. 23 Warning and indicator lamps ....... 24 Instrument cluster lighting Adjusting ............................... 115 Notes ..................................... 109 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Interior lighting ........................... 69 Automatic control ...................... 70 Overview ................................. 69 Reading lamp ............................ 69 Replacing bulbs ........................ 74 Setting the ambient lighting ...... 116 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................... 116 Intermittent wiping ........................ 75 J Jack Using ..................................... 197 Jump start (engine) see Jump starting (engine) Jump starting (engine) ................... 168 K Key Display message ....................... 130 Kickdown Driving tips ............................. 94 Manual gearshifting .................. 96 Knee bag ...................................... 35 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Language (on-board computer) ......... 117 License plate lighting Replacing ................................ 74 Light sensor (display message) ........ 130 Lighting Setting the ambient lighting ...... 116 Lights Automatic headlamp mode ............ 67 Display message ....................... 128 Fog lamps ................................ 68 Hazard warning lamps ................. 69 High beam flasher ..................... 69 8 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

High-beam headlamps ................. 69

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 19 · Applies to: 453

Light switch ............................. 67 Low-beam headlamps .................. 68 Parking lamps ........................... 68 Rear fog lamp ........................... 68 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................... 116 Turn signals ............................. 68 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs Loading guidelines ....................... 142 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ................................ 55 Emergency locking ..................... 55 From inside (central locking button) .................................... 54 Locking centrally see Central locking Loudspeaker see Subwoofer Low-beam headlamps Changing bulbs ......................... 72 Switching on/off ....................... 68 Lubricant additives see Additives (engine oil) M M+S tires (winter tires) ................. 179 Malfunction message see Display messages Manual transmission Engaging reverse gear ................ 91 Gear lever ................................ 91 Malfunction (on-board computer with a color display) ................. 130 Pulling away ............................. 88 Shift recommendation ................. 91 Shifting to neutral .................... 91 Starting the engine ................... 88 Manually releasing the selector lever lock (automatic transmis- sion) ........................................... 97 Matte finish (cleaning instruc- tions) ......................................... 156 Message memory (color display) ....... 113 Message memory (on-board com- puter) ......................................... 113 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Frequencies ............................ 204 Installation ............................ 204 Transmission output (maximum) .. 204 Model series see Vehicle identification plate Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ................ 200 Mounting a new wheel ................ 199 Preparing the vehicle ............... 197 Raising the vehicle .................. 197 Removing a wheel ..................... 199 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ............................ 197 Multi-functional seat see Seats Multifunction steering wheel Overview ................................. 25 N Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ... 86 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ............................... 36 Faults ..................................... 40 Operation ................................ 37 System self-test ........................ 39 Occupant safety Children in the vehicle .............. 42 Important safety notes ................ 29 Introduction to the restraint system ..................................... 29 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ...................................... 36 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ...................................... 30 Pets in the vehicle .................... 46 Index 9 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Restraint system warning lamp ..... 30

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 20 · Applies to: 453

Seat belt .................................. 31 OCS Conditions ............................... 36 Faults ..................................... 40 Operation ................................ 37 System self-test ........................ 39 Odometer ..................................... 112 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Displaying a service message ..... 154 Important safety notes ............... 109 Menu overview .......................... 111 Message memory ....................... 113 Messages menu ......................... 113 Operating (color display) ........... 111 Operation ............................... 111 Selecting the language .............. 117 Service menu ........................... 113 Settings menu .......................... 114 Submenu display ....................... 115 On-board diagnostic interface see Diagnostics connection Operating safety Declaration of conformity ........... 19 Important safety notes ................ 18 Operating system see On-board computer Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ..................... 17 Outside temperature display Notes ..................................... 109 Setting the units ...................... 116 Overhead control panel .................... 27 Overrevving range ......................... 110 P Paint code number ........................ 205 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .... 156 Panic alarm .................................. 29 Panoramic roof Cleaning ................................ 157 Operating the roller sunblind ...... 60 Park brake see Parking brake Parking ...................................... 100 Important safety notes ............... 100 Parking brake .......................... 101 Switching off the engine ............ 101 Parking brake Display message ....................... 119 Notes/function ......................... 101 Warning lamp .......................... 132 Parking lamps Switching on and off .................. 68 PASSENGER AIR BAG Indicator lamps ........................ 30 Pets in the vehicle ......................... 46 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- tions) ......................................... 158 Power washers .............................. 155 Power windows see Side windows Program selector button .................. 94 Protection against theft Anti-theft alarm system .............. 46 Immobilizer ............................. 46 Protection of the environment General notes ............................ 16 Pulling away Automatic transmission .............. 88 General notes ........................... 88 Manual transmission .................. 88 Q QR code Rescue card .............................. 20 Qualified specialist workshop ......... 20 R Radio-wave reception/transmis- sion in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ........... 19 Rain and light sensor (display mes- sage) .......................................... 130 Reading lamp ................................ 69 Rear fog lamp Changing bulbs ......................... 73 Switching on/off ....................... 68 Rear lamps Changing bulbs ......................... 73 10 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rear parking aid

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 21 · Applies to: 453

Activating/deactivating ............ 108 Function/notes ........................ 107 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................ 84 Switching on/off ....................... 82 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade ........... 76 Switching on/off ....................... 75 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ................... 66 Recycling see Protection of the environment Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem) Important safety notes ............... 211 Refueling Fuel gauge .............................. 110 Important safety notes ................ 97 Refueling process ..................... 98 see Fuel Replacing bulbs Important safety notes ................ 70 Interior lighting ...................... 74 Overview of bulb types ................ 70 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) ...................... 72 Side turn signal lamps ............... 73 Rescue card .................................. 20 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ....................... 125 see Fuel Restraint system Display message ....................... 119 Introduction ............................ 29 Warning lamp .......................... 132 Warning lamp (function) .............. 30 Reverse gear Engaging (manual transmission) ... 91 Reversing feature Side windows ............................ 58 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) ....... 17 Roller sunblind for the panorama roof Operating ................................ 60 Roof see Panoramic roof Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ................................. 160 S Safety Child restraint systems .............. 43 Children in the vehicle .............. 42 see Operating safety Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat Folding the front-passenger seat down ................................. 63 Seat belts Cleaning ................................ 159 Correct usage ........................... 32 Fastening ................................ 33 Important safety guidelines ........ 31 Introduction ............................. 31 Releasing ................................ 33 Warning lamp ........................... 131 Warning lamp (function) .............. 33 Seats Adjusting (manually) .................. 62 Cleaning the cover ................... 159 Correct driver's seat position ...... 61 Important safety notes ................ 61 Seat heating problem ................. 65 Switching seat heating on/off ...... 64 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 158 Service Center see Qualified specialist workshop Service cover ............................... 151 Service display Calling up (on-board computer with a color display) ................. 113 Displaying a service message ..... 154 Hiding a service message .......... 154 Notes ..................................... 153 Resetting ............................... 154 Service message ....................... 153 Special service requirements ..... 154 Service products Brake fluid ............................. 210 Coolant (engine) ...................... 210 Index 11 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine oil .............................. 209

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 22 · Applies to: 453

Fuel ...................................... 207 Important safety notes .............. 207 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ................................... 211 Washer fluid ............................ 211 Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting the air distribution ............. 81 Setting the airflow ......................... 82 Shifting to neutral (manual trans- mission) ....................................... 91 Side turn signal lamps Replacing bulbs ........................ 73 Side windows Cleaning ................................ 157 Important safety information ....... 57 Opening/closing ....................... 58 Problem (malfunction) ................ 60 Resetting ................................ 59 smart center see Qualified specialist workshop SmartKey Changing the battery .................. 52 Door central locking/unlocking .... 51 Important safety notes ................ 51 Loss ........................................ 53 Positions (ignition lock) ............ 87 Problem (malfunction) ................ 53 Starting the engine ................... 88 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .... 87 Snow chains ................................. 179 Sockets Center console ......................... 147 General notes .......................... 147 Speakers see Subwoofer Special seat belt retractor .............. 43 Specialist workshop ....................... 20 Speedometer Digital .................................. 109 In the Instrument cluster ........... 109 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) see Restraint system Starting (engine) ........................... 87 Starting the engine see Starting (engine) Steering Display message (color display) .. 128 Warning lamps ......................... 141 Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) .................. 65 Button overview ........................ 25 Cleaning ................................ 159 Important safety notes ................ 65 Paddle shifters ......................... 96 Stowage areas .............................. 142 Stowage compartment Door stowage compartment .......... 143 Stowage compartment in the tail- gate ........................................... 143 Stowage compartments Center console ......................... 143 Cup holders ............................. 146 Glove box ............................... 143 Important safety information ...... 142 Stowage space Stowage compartment in the tailgate ................................. 143 Submenu Ambient lighting ..................... 116 Subwoofer Fitting/removing ..................... 145 Summer tires In winter ................................ 179 Sun visor ..................................... 147 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off .......................................... 84 T Tachometer .................................. 110 Tailgate Important safety notes ................ 56 Opening dimensions ................. 212 Opening/closing ....................... 57 Warning lamp ........................... 141 Tank see Fuel tank Tank content Fuel gauge .............................. 110 Technical data Capacities ............................. 207 12 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Information ............................ 204

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 23 · Applies to: 453

Tires/wheels ........................... 200 Vehicle data ........................... 212 Temperature Coolant .................................. 113 Outside temperature ................. 109 Setting (climate control) ............ 81 Setting the display units ........... 116 Thorax/pelvisbag ........................... 35 Time Setting ................................... 114 Setting (dashboard clock) ........... 110 Setting the time format (on- board computer with a color display) ................................. 114 Tire pressure Checking manually .................... 183 Display message ....................... 126 Important safety notes ............... 183 Maximum ................................ 182 Not reached (TIREFIT) ................ 163 Notes ..................................... 181 Reached (TIREFIT) .................... 163 Recommended .......................... 180 Tire pressure monitor Function/notes ........................ 183 General notes .......................... 183 Important safety notes ............... 183 Restarting (on-board computer with color display) ................... 185 Warning lamp .......................... 139 Warning message ...................... 184 TIREFIT kit .................................. 161 Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ........... 195 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .............. 194 Bar (definition) ....................... 194 Changing a wheel ..................... 196 Characteristics ....................... 194 Checking ................................ 178 Curb weight (definition) ........... 195 Definition of terms .................. 194 Direction of rotation ................ 197 Display message ....................... 126 Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) .............. 196 DOT (Department of Transporta- tion) (definition) ..................... 194 DOT, Tire Identification Num- ber (TIN) ................................ 193 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ............................ 195 General notes .......................... 200 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ............................ 195 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) (definition) ...................... 195 Important safety notes ............... 177 Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (defini- tion) ...................................... 194 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 195 Labeling (overview) .................. 191 Load bearing index (definition) .. 196 Load index .............................. 193 Load index (definition) ............. 195 M+S tires (winter tires) ............. 179 Maximum load on a tire (defini- tion) ...................................... 195 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ............................ 195 Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ................ 195 Maximum tire load .................... 193 Maximum tire load (definition) ... 195 Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................ 196 PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ............................ 195 Replacing ............................... 196 Service life ............................ 178 Sidewall (definition) ................ 196 Snow chains ............................. 179 Speed rating (definition) .......... 195 Storing .................................. 197 Structure and characteristics (definition) ............................ 194 Summer tires in winter .............. 179 Temperature ............................ 190 TIN (Tire Identification Num- ber) (definition) ...................... 196 Tire bead (definition) .............. 196 Tire pressure (definition) ......... 195 Tire pressures (recommended) .... 194 Index 13 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tire size (data) .......................

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 24 · Applies to: 453

200 Tire size designation, load- bearing capacity, speed rating ... 191 Tire tread ............................... 178 Tire tread (definition) .............. 196 Total load limit (definition) ...... 196 Traction ................................. 190 Traction (definition) ................ 196 Tread wear .............................. 190 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ............................... 189 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .............. 194 Wear indicator (definition) ....... 196 Wheel and tire combination ....... 202 Wheel rim (definition) .............. 195 see Flat tire Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .................................... 44 Total distance recorder Setting the display unit ............. 116 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ......... 172 Important safety notes ............... 170 Towing away Important safety guidelines ....... 170 Installing the towing eye ........... 171 Removing the towing eye ............ 171 With both axles on the ground ...... 171 With the rear axle raised ........... 171 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transmission position display ......... 92 Transporting the vehicle ................ 172 Trip computer (on-board computer) ... 112 Trip meter Setting the display unit ............. 116 Setting the display units ........... 116 Trip odometer Calling up .............................. 112 Trunk Fitting the cover ..................... 144 Installing/removing the cover .... 145 see Tailgate Trunk (front) see Service cover Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................ 72 Changing bulbs (rear) ................. 73 Switching on/off ....................... 68 Turn signals see Turn signals Two-way radio Frequencies ............................ 204 Installation ............................ 204 Transmission output (maximum) .. 204 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking .................. 55 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ...................... 54 V Vehicle Correct use .............................. 20 Data acquisition ....................... 20 Electronics malfunction (dis- play message) .......................... 130 Electronics malfunction (warn- ing lamp) ................................ 141 Equipment ................................ 17 Loading .................................. 185 Locking (in an emergency) ........... 55 Locking (SmartKey) .................... 51 Lowering ................................ 200 Maintenance ............................. 17 Parking for a long period .......... 102 Pulling away ............................. 88 Raising .................................. 197 Reporting problems ................... 20 Securing from rolling away ........ 197 Tow-starting ........................... 170 Towing away ............................ 170 Transporting ........................... 172 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........ 55 Unlocking (SmartKey) ................. 51 Vehicle data ........................... 212 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ................................ 212 14 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle dimensions ....................... 212

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 25 · Applies to: 453

Vehicle emergency locking .............. 55 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .......... 205 Vehicle key see SmartKey Vehicle tool kit ............................ 161 Ventilation see Climate control VIN ............................................ 205 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ....................................... 134 Airbag ................................... 132 Battery ................................... 137 Brakes ................................... 132 Check Engine ........................... 136 Coolant .................................. 138 Distance warning function (red) .. 136 Distance warning function (yel- low) ....................................... 135 Door ...................................... 141 EBD ....................................... 133 Electronics ............................. 141 ESP® ...................................... 134 Oil pressure ............................ 138 Overview ................................. 24 Parking brake .......................... 132 PASSENGER AIR BAG .................... 30 Restraint system ...................... 132 Seat belt ................................. 131 Steering ................................. 141 Tire pressure monitor ............... 139 Warranty ....................................... 17 Wheel and tire combination see Tires Wheel bolt tightening torque .......... 200 Wheels Changing a wheel ..................... 196 Checking ................................ 178 Cleaning ................................ 157 General notes .......................... 200 Important safety notes ............... 177 Interchanging/changing ............ 196 Mounting a new wheel ................ 199 Mounting a wheel ...................... 197 Removing a wheel ..................... 199 Snow chains ............................. 179 Storing .................................. 197 Tightening torque .................... 200 Wheel size/tire size ................. 200 Window curtain air bag Operation ................................ 36 Windows see Side windows Windscreen see Windshield Windshield Defrosting ............................... 82 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid .................. 153 Important safety notes ............... 211 Windshield wipers Intermittent wiping ................... 75 Problem (malfunction) ................ 78 Rear window wiper ..................... 75 Replacing the wiper blades ......... 75 Switching on/off ....................... 74 Winter driving Slippery road surfaces .............. 105 Snow chains ............................. 179 Winter operation General notes .......................... 179 Winter tires M+S tires ................................ 179 Wiper blades Cleaning ................................ 157 Important safety notes ................ 75 Replacing (rear window) ............. 76 Replacing (windshield) ............... 76 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Index 15 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Protection of the environment

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 26 · Applies to: 453

General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of com- prehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resour- ces that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environ- mentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con- tribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. RAlways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehi- cle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traf- fic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- sumption. Environmental concerns and recom- mendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the rel- evant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine smart parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- tems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels 16

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

as well as accessories relevant to safety

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 27 · Applies to: 453

which have not been approved by smart. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only gen- uine smart parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine smart parts are subject to strict quality control. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for smart vehicles and fine-tuned for them. Therefore, only genuine smart parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine smart parts are available for smart models. All smart centers maintain a supply of genu- ine smart parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically loca- ted parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 205) when ordering gen- uine smart parts. Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a smart center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- let are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The smart USA Warranty booklet (USA only) or the Warranty booklet (Canada only) contains detailed information about the warranties covering your smart, including: Rsmart USA Limited Warranty (USA only RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty (Canada only) REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty Rwarranty against perforation through cor- rosion RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System War- ranty Rsmartmove Assistance (Canada only) RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon Laws) Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always bring the Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet with you when bringing the vehicle to an authorized smart center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The smartmove Assistance (Canada) and smart 1 service (USA) Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number 1-800-762-7887 (in USA) 1-877-627-8004 (in Canada) will be answered by smart Customer Assis- tance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. In accordance with standard program guidelines, Roadside Assistance provides vehicle service up to a reasonable distance from the next paved road. We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown situation; however, the accessibility of your vehicle

Introduction. 17 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

will be determined by our authorized smart

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 28 · Applies to: 453

center technical help or the tow service pro- vider on a case-by-case basis. Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to be a reasonably accessible roadside location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider. For additional information refer to the smart Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the Warranty Booklet (Canada) in your vehi- cle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of owner- ship In the USA: If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Information Change Card” found in the Warranty Information Booklet. In Canada: If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Warranty Booklet, or simply call the Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100. Maintaining your current address informa- tion with smart will enable us to contact you should important new information about the vehicle, such as recalls, become available. If you sell your smart, please leave all liter- ature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. In the USA: If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Information Change Card” found in the Warranty Information Booklet. In Canada: If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Pre‑Owned Vehicle Purchase” found in the Warranty Booklet, or call the Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100. Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: RService facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with cata- lytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the cata- lysts. RGasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/main- tenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified special- ist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, sys- tems relevant to safety could also be affec- ted. As a result, these may no longer func- tion as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and 18

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

electronic equipment carried out at a

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 29 · Applies to: 453

qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the under- carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on con- tinuing your journey you notice that driv- ing safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist work- shop. Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Opera- tion is subject to the following two condi- tions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper- ation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s author- ity to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde- sired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- tics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equip- ment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the

Introduction. 19 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

requirements of the next emissions test dur-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 30 · Applies to: 453

ing the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A smart center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to cor- rectly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- let. Always have the following work carried out at a smart center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifi- cations Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dan- gers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe Technical Data section in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized smart center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. Do not drive the vehi- cle if you believe it may not be safely oper- ated. If the matter is not handled to your sat- isfaction, please discuss the problem with the smart center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645 In Canada Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 QR codes for rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appro- priate rescue card for your vehicle. The cur- rent rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. Data stored in the vehicle Data recording This vehicle is capable of recording diag- nostic information relating to vehicle oper- ation, malfunctions, and user settings. This may include information about the perform- ance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle functions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understand- ing how a vehicle’s systems performed in cer- tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record 20

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

data related to vehicle dynamics and safety

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 31 · Applies to: 453

systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs. No data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions. No personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and accident location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representa- tion include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local gov- ernment; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidia- ries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: the EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR com- ponent may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre- empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws related to EDRs. Information on copyright General information You can find information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehi- cle and its electronic components on the fol- lowing website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction. 21 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dashboard

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 32 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Dashboard instruments 110 ; Instrument cluster 23 = Horn ? Windshield wipers combi- nation switch 74 A Switches the automatic locking feature on/off 55 Switches the hazard warn- ing lamps on/off 69 B Overhead control panel 27 C smart Audio-System/smart Media-System (see the sep- arate operating instruc- tions) Function Page D Climate control system control panel 79 E Ignition lock 87 F Adjusts the steering wheel 65 G Control panel for: Turning the forward colli- sion warning on/off 48 Turning the parking aid on/ off 107 H Lights combination switch 67 I Shift paddles 96 22 Dashboard

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Instrument cluster

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 33 · Applies to: 453

Displays Function Page : Speedometer 109 ; Color display 111 Function Page = Warning and indicator lamps 24 Instrument cluster 23

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning and indicator lamps

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 34 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : USA: ò ABS 134 Canada: ! ABS 134 ; ÷ ESP® 134 = í Battery 137 ? h Tire pressure monitor 139 A 5 Oil pressure 138 B D Power steering 141 C ; Check Engine 136 D ? Coolant temperature 138 E ! Turn signal, right 68 F

Turn signal, left

68 G USA: $ Brakes 132 Canada: J Brakes 132 Function Page H R Rear fog lamp 68 I N Fog lamps 68 J K High-beam headlamps 69 K L Low-beam headlamps 68 L 6Restraint system 29 M T Parking lamps 68 N · Distance warning 136 O ü Seat belts 131 P \ Doors or the tailgate 141 Vehicle electronics 141 24 Instrument cluster

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Multifunction steering wheel

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 35 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Color display in instrument cluster 111 ; smart Audio-System or smart Media-System dis- play (see the separate operating instructions) = W X Changes the vol- ume of the smart Audio-Sys- tem or smart Media-System (see the separate operating instructions) ? Switches voice-oper- ated control of the smart Audio-System on/off and accepts/ends a call (see the separate operating instructions) ? Cruise control button 105 ® Increases or stores the current speed −Decreases current speed RES Selects a stored speed Function Page A Cruise control button 105 ° Calls up the last speed stored B Cruise control button 105 ±Interrupts cruise con- trol C Cruise control button V 105 u ^ Activates or deactivates cruise control D 9 : Scrolls through a menu or list 111 a Confirming your selection 111 Changes to the "Reset val- ues" function in certain menus 111 Hiding display messages 118 i Voice-operated control as well as control of the telephone and volume using the steering wheel buttons in the control panel on the right = only function with the smart Media-System. If you use a smart Audio- System or an audio device from another manufacturer, the functions may be restricted or not available at all. Multifunction steering wheel 25

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Center console

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 36 · Applies to: 453

i Vehicles with automatic transmission Function Page : Cup holder 146 ; Transmission position display 93 = Sets the driving program (program selector button) 94 ? Drawer 143 A Coin holder Function Page B Selector lever 92 C Parking brake 101 D AUX/USB port and SD mem- ory card (only with smart Media-System) Socket 147 E Cup holder 146 26 Center console

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Overhead control panel

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 37 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; Depending on the position of the switch: Interior lighting switched on 69 Automatic interior light- ing control on 70 Interior lighting switched off 69 Function Page ; Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 69 ? PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF/ON indicator lamps 30 A Rear-view mirror 66 Overhead control panel 27

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Door control panel

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 38 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Opens the door 54 ; Adjusts the exterior mir- rors electrically 66 Function Page = W Opens/closes the side windows 57 28 Door control panel

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 39 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Panic alarm X To activate: press ! button : for about two seconds. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint sys- tem may also reduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occupants when an accident occurs. The restraint system includes: RSeat belt system RAir bags The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only offer the intended level of protection if all vehicle occupants: Rare correctly wearing their seat belts. (Y page 32) Radjust their seat properly (Y page 61). The driver is also responsible for ensuring that the steering wheel has been correctly positioned. Observe the information relat- ing to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 61). Always ensure the air bag can inflate prop- erly if deployed (Y page 34). An air bag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if the protection already pro- vided by a correctly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bags are not deployed. Fur- thermore, only the air bags that would increase the degree of protection afforded to the vehicle occupants in the event of an acci- dent are deployed. Seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects pen- etrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 40). See “Children in the vehicle” for information on children traveling with you as well as vehicle restraint systems (Y page 42). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the elec- tronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag sys- tem to accommodate a person with disabil- Occupant safety 29

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ities, contact a smart center for specific

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 40 · Applies to: 453

details. USA only: contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800‑762-7887 for details. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is run- ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec- ted in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is star- ted. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or might not be trig- gered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or air bag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist work- shop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front- passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Depending on the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 36) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward- facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the clas- sification of the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 36). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 31) and "Air bags" 30 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

(Y page 34). There you can also find infor-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 41 · Applies to: 453

mation on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occu- pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt guide quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direc- tion of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters are synchronized with the front air bags which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccu- pied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an acci- dent, during braking or when abruptly changing direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the back- rest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoul- der. G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause Occupant safety 31

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

additional injury, for example, in an acci-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 42 · Applies to: 453

dent, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this smart vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- tion system (OCS)" (Y page 36) G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their inten- ded protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emer- gency Tensioning Devices could acciden- tally trigger or fail to deploy when neces- sary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Fol- lowing an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by smart. Proper use of the seat belts Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat belt (Y page 31). All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat belt correctly before setting off. Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly for the entire journey. When fastening the seat belt, make sure that: RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt buckle that belongs to the seat. RThe seat belt is tightened across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. RThe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces produced in the event of an accident be evenly distributed across the belt. RThe shoulder section of the belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt should not come into contact with your neck and must not be routed under the arm. RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos- sible over your lap. The lap belt must always pass across your hip joints and never across your stomach or abdomen. Pregnant women must take par- ticular care. If necessary, the lap belt can be pushed down across the hip joints and pulled tight using the shoulder section. RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g. eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these items in a more suitable location. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. On no account should babies or children travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’s occupants. 32 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Also make sure that there are no objects,

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 43 · Applies to: 453

e.g. cushions, between the occupant and the seat. Seat belts are solely intended for the pro- tection and restraint of the vehicle occu- pants. To secure objects, luggage or loads, always observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 142). Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 31) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 32). For easy fastening, the seat belt passes through a belt loop on the side of the seat. Basic illustration X Adjust the seat (Y page 61). The seat backrest must be in an almost ver- tical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. In order to attach the child restraint system securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the front-passenger seat is equipped with a spe- cial seat belt retractor. Further information on the "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 43). Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their pro- tective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addi- tion, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas- tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp starts to light up continuously after these six seconds. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h) and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt is not fastened, a warning tone sounds again. The warning tone sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 120 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fas- tened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. Occupant safety 33

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Air bags

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 44 · Applies to: 453

Introduction The air bag installation point is identified by the label AIR BAG. An air bag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. However, it is not intended as a substitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide additional protection in the event of an acci- dent. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The various air bag systems work independ- ently of each other (Y page 40). There is, however, no system available today that can completely rule out injury or death. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat posi- tion, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- pants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- erwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 30). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- tem (OCS)" (Y page 36) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side windows. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. 34 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 45 · Applies to: 453

If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occu- pants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Front air bags Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- tional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the driver's and front- passenger seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the front-passenger air bag (Y page 30). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 36). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 37) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Knee bags Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer- ing column and front-passenger knee bag ; under the glove box. The driver's and front- passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats. Thorax/pelvis air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occu- pants as they are designed to do. In addi- tion, the operation of the occupant classi- fication system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by smart. Occupant safety 35

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Thorax/pelvis air bags : deploy next to the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 46 · Applies to: 453

outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the thorax/pelvis air bags offer additional thorax and pelvis protec- tion. In the event of a side impact, the thorax/ pelvis air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The thorax/pelvis air bag on the front- passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the thorax/pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appro- priate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Window curtain air bags Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame above the doors. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window cur- tain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 40). Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front- passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front- passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe thorax/pelvis air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if pos- sible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- fication, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- selves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- 36 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

facing child restraint system must lie as flat

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 47 · Applies to: 453

as possible against the backrest of the front-

passenger seat.

The child restraint system must not touch the

roof. Adjust the backrest angle accordingly.

Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function

correctly. Always observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions.

How the occupant classification system

(OCS) operates

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp The indicator lamps indicate whether the front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- tion lock. The system carries out a self-diagnosis test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for about six seconds. The indicator lamps then display the status of the front-passenger front air bag: RPASSENGER AIRBAG ON lights up: the front- passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the case of an accident, all deployment cri- teria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIRBAG OFF lights up: the front- passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Always observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps when the front-passenger seat is occupied. Make sure that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct before and during a journey. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehi- cle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the per- son in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up, the front- passenger front air bag may deploy in an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward- facing child restraint system to the front- passenger seat. For more information, see Occupant safety 37

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

"Problems with the Occupant Classification

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 48 · Applies to: 453

System (OCS)" (Y page 40). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front- passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the belt guide. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS detects that: Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deac- tivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child aged up to twelve months in a stand- ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up con- tinuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. In the case of a twelve-month-old child in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp may light up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is acti- vated. Categorization is dependent on the type of child restraint system and the stat- ure of the child, for example. Make sure that the prerequisites for correct catego- rization have been met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp remains lit, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or a small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continuously after the sys- tem's self-diagnosis test depending on the categorization. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, position the front- passenger seat as far back as possible. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up, a person of smaller stat- ure should not sit on the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of an appropriate size, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is acti- vated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42). If the OCS is malfunctioning, both the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultane- ously. In this case, the front-passenger air bag is deactivated and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Consult a smart center. Only have the front- passenger seat repaired at a smart center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the nec- essary repair work carried out at a smart cen- ter. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use seat accessories which have been approved by smart. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classifica- tion System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat. Depending on the result, the front-passenger air bag is acti- vated or deactivated. 38 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

System self-test

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 49 · Applies to: 453

G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front- passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disa- bled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front- passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the per- son in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front- passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instruc- tions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 37). For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 40). Occupant safety 39

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the occupant classification system (OCS)

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 50 · Applies to: 453

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 39). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit, even though the front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult. The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorrect. X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 36). X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used. X Have the OCS checked at a smart center as soon as possible. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: Runoccupied Roccupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front- passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Have the OCS checked at a smart center as soon as possible. Deployment of belt tensioners and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe- cialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. For your own safety and that of your front passenger, it is important that you have deployed air bags replaced and faulty air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. 40 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 51 · Applies to: 453

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been trig- gered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warn- ing lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released gener- ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing dif- ficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- rial, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guide- lines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron- tal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further informa- tion under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 30) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective seat If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independ- ently of each other in certain frontal colli- sion situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and front- passenger knee bags RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt The front-passenger front air bag is activa- ted or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front- passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 30). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few millisec- onds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceler- ation and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the col- lision Rthe collision angle Occupant safety 41

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rthe deformation characteristics of the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 52 · Applies to: 453

vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of decel- eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and suf- ficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the control unit of the restraint system detects a side impact or a vehicle rollover, the relevant components of the restraint sys- tem are activated separately depending on the anticipated type of accident. RThorax/pelvis air bag on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt The thorax/pelvis air bag on the front- passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys- tem determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of acci- dent: RFrontal collision RSide impact RRollover Children in the vehicle Important safety notes If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 36) G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are sub- jected to prolonged exposure to extreme 42 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, pos-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 53 · Applies to: 453

sibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If thechildrestraintsystem is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Read and follow the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 31) and the notes on correct use of the seat belts (Y page 32). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly with- out a booster seat. Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, pos- sibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system prop- erly. The seat belt on the front-passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retrac- tor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Always comply with the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instruc- tions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt loop. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat belt retractor retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated. X Press the child restraint system down so that the seat belt fits tightly and does not slacken. Removing a child restraint system and deac- tivating the special seat belt retractor: X Always comply with the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instruc- tions. X Press the seat belt buckle release button, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back towards the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deacti- vated. Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Children in the vehicle 43

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 54 · Applies to: 453

If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direc- tion. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting com- pletely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 142). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or sub- jected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direc- tion. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. Securing systems for child restraint systems include: Rthe seat belt system Rthe Top Tether anchorages i If you install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, make sure that the backrest is securely engaged (Y page 63). i If a child is carried on the front- passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 45). There you will also find information on disabling the front-passenger front air- bag. All child restraint systems must meet the fol- lowing standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- ards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connec- tion between the child restraint system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint 44 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

system is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 55 · Applies to: 453

should always be used.

Top Tether anchorages

Loop ; Top Tether anchorage ; Top Tether anchorage = Top Tether hook ? Top Tether belt Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the lug- gage compartment floor. X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the head restraint, keeping it as central as possi- ble, into the luggage compartment through loop :. X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether belt = into Top Tether anchorage ;. Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. Make sure that: RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown. RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply with the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions when doing so. Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat General notes If you secure a child in a child restraint sys- tem on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 36). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- board Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rear- ward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disa- bled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit is the front-passenger front airbag disabled. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat, always move the front- passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is cor- rectly routed from the front-passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the front-passenger seat belt guide. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Children in the vehicle 45

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Pets in the vehicle

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 56 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unse- cured in the vehicle, they could press but- tons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an acci- dent or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable ani- mal transport box. Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct Smart Key. X To activate: remove the Smart Key from the ignition lock. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart Key with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid Smart Key that is left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be star- ted when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter or call 1-800-367-6372 (in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Anti-theft alarm system Switching on X Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rno objects, such as mascots, are hanging from the rear-view mirror or grab han- dles. This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe tailgate is closed Rthe service cover is closed. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approx- imately 30 seconds. i If the service cover is open or is not properly closed, the vehicle will be locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. To remind you that the service cover is not secured, a warning tone sounds for 30 seconds. Ensure that the service cover is properly closed. Only then is the anti-theft alarm system correctly primed and the service cover properly secured. Switching off X Press the % button on the key. or X Unlock the vehicle by using the key in the emergency lock. and Switch on the ignition. Examples for triggering the alarm A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Rthe vehicle by using the key in the emer- gency lock Ra door Rthe tailgate Rthe service cover 46 Protection against theft

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching off the alarm

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 57 · Applies to: 453

X To switch off the alarm: press the % button on the key. The alarm is switched off. or X Switch on the ignition. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 47) RDistance warning function (Y page 48) Resp® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 49) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 50) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety sys- tems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- ing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 177). In wintry driving conditions, always use win- ter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart, or fine- link snow chains that are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist work- shop. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehi- cle when braking. The ! (Canada only) or ò (USA only) abs warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 47). When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 132) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 121). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety sys- tems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist workshop. abs works from a speed of about 4 mph (6 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently. Driving safety systems 47

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Braking

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 58 · Applies to: 453

X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If abs intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- tion of hazardous road conditions, and func- tions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Forward collision warning General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehi- cle ahead or reduce the effects of such an accident. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Starting the engine also switches on the dis- tance warning function. Important safety notes G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situa- tions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and com- plex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning func- tion may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the dis- tance warning function. Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 47). In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors. Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflec- tions, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the dis- tance warning system Please observe the information in the sec- tion on running-in the vehicle (Y page 86). Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Function 48 Driving safety systems

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To switch off: press button ;.

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 59 · Applies to: 453

Indicator lamp : lights up. X To switch on: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- tions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 45 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 47). esp® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If esp® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. esp® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. esp® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 47). ETS traction control is part of esp®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel with traction. Important safety notes G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, fur- ther driving safety systems are deactiva- ted. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you test the parking brake using a brake dynamometer, switch the ignition off. Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth- erwise destroy the brake system. When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on esp® (Y page 171). If the ÷ esp® warning lamp lights up per- manently, esp® or hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 134) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 121). i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will esp® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ esp® warning lamp goes out before the journey begins, esp® is automatically active. If esp® intervenes, the ÷ esp® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. Driving safety systems 49

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If esp® intervenes:

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 60 · Applies to: 453

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the pre- vailing road and weather conditions. Crosswind Assist General information Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into esp® significantly reduces these effects. esp® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle. esp® intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. crosswind assist is active at vehicle speeds above 45 mph (70 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. Important safety notes crosswind assist does not work if esp® is dis- abled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving sta- bility while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 47). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- dent. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling character- istics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 134) as well as display messages (Y page 120). 50 Driving safety systems

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 61 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all

models and all standard and optional

equipment of your vehicle available at the

time of publication of the Operator's Man-

ual. Country-specific differences are pos-

sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may

not feature all functions described here.

This also applies to safety-relevant sys-

tems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified spe-

cialist workshops: (Y page 20).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the

vehicle, they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehi-

cle in motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshift the automatic transmission out of

park position P or shift manual trans-

mission into neutral.

Rstart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey

out of reach of children.

G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-

tionally turned in the ignition lock. This

could cause the engine to be switched off.

There is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to

the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings

before inserting the SmartKey into the

ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-

netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control

function could be affected.

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the

vicinity of powerful electrical installa-

tions.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile

phone or another SmartKey

Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal

foil

Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

SmartKey functions

% Unlocks the driver's door/vehicle ; & Locks the vehicle = Opens the tailgate X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button. The % button must be pressed a second time within 20 seconds to unlock the front- passenger's door. This function can be acti- vated or deactivated in the smart Media-Sys- tem (see the separate operating instruc- tions). If you do not open the vehicle within approx- imately 2 minutes of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rprotection against theft is reactivated SmartKey 51

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To unlock and open the tailgate: press and

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 62 · Applies to: 453

hold the button on the key. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash twice. Locking is confirmed by an audible signal. SmartKey battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special han- dling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. smart recommends that you have the batteries changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2032 3V cell battery. X Insert a suitable tool, such as a coin, into the opening of the key. Turn the tool until cover : of the battery tray opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Remove battery ;. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contami- nants. X Insert battery tray cover : into the hous- ing and press to close. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. 52 SmartKey

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the SmartKey

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 63 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Do this by pressing the % or & button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. If this does not work: X Change the key battery if necessary (Y page 52). X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock (Y page 55) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking (Y page 55). There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Do this by pressing the % or & button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock (Y page 55) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking (Y page 55). X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a Smart- Key. X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work- shop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. the on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or inte- rior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 164). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 168). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. When you turn the key, turn the steering wheel in both direc- tions. SmartKey 53

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Doors

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 64 · Applies to: 453

Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehi- cle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Preferably stow luggage or loads in the lug- gage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 142). Unlocking and opening doors from the inside X Pull door handle :. The door opens. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. X Pull door handle :. The door unlocks and opens. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 47). Centrally locking or unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. X To lock: when the vehicle is unlocked, press button :. The vehicle locks when all the doors and the tailgate are closed. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X To lock the vehicle from the inside when exiting the vehicle: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Open the driver's door. The front-passenger door and the tailgate must be closed. X Press the locking button (Y page 54). X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds. Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. 54 Doors

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 65 · Applies to: 453

are locked. X To unlock: when the vehicle is locked, press button :. The vehicle is unlocked. Indicator lamp ; goes out. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 47). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlocking is taken into account, if: Rit was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rit was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, then only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey. Automatic locking feature X To deactivate: with the ignition switched on, press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate with the ignition switched on, press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore lock yourself out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on or off in the smart Media-System; see the separate operating instructions. Unlocking the driver's door (emer- gency lock) If you can no longer unlock the vehicle using the remote control key, use the emergency lock. If you use the key in the emergency lock to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti- theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 47). X Carefully remove the cover from the emer- gency lock. X Insert the key into the emergency lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The door is unlocked. X Turn the key back and remove it. X Replace the cover on the emergency lock and press until it engages. Locking the driver's door (emergency locking) If you can no longer lock the vehicle using the remote control key, use the locking button on the instrument cluster (Y page 54). Doors 55

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 66 · Applies to: 453

lock. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 54). X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds. Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. If this does not work, use the emergency lock- ing. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 54). X Check whether the front-passenger door is locked. If necessary, carry out the follow- ing steps on both doors. X Insert the tip of the key into slit :. X Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 2. On the passenger door, the direction of rotation is reversed. X Close the driver's door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using the emer- gency locking, the tailgate and fuel filler flap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. Cargo compartment Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maximum load of 220 lbs (100 kg). It may otherwise become damaged. ! The tailgates swings backwards, upwards and downwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient space above, behind and under the tailgates. i The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 212). Preferably stow luggage or loads in the lug- gage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 142). Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com- partment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 56 Cargo compartment

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening or closing

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 67 · Applies to: 453

Opening the upper tailgate X If the vehicle is locked, first press the % button on the key. Press button :. The upper tailgate opens slightly. or X Press and hold the button on the key. The upper tailgate opens slightly. or X Press the button on the left under the steering wheel. The upper tailgate opens slightly. X Swing the upper tailgate up. Opening the lower tailgate X Pull release catch : upwards. Swing the lower tailgate down. Closing the tailgate X Swing the lower tailgate upwards until it engages audibly. X Pull the upper tailgate down and push closed. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key. Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Side windows 57

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Side window reversing feature

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 68 · Applies to: 453

In vehicles with the convenience feature, the

side windows are equipped with an automatic

reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or

restricts a side window from traveling

upwards during the automatic closing proc-

ess, the side window opens again automati-

cally. During the manual closing process, the

side window only opens again automatically

after the corresponding switch is released.

The automatic reversing feature is only an

aid and is no substitute for your attention

when closing a side window.

G WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small

fingers

Rwhile resetting

This means that the reversing feature can-

not prevent someone being trapped in these

situations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close

proximity during the closing procedure. If

someone becomes trapped, press the switch

to open the side window again.

G WARNING

If you close a side window again immedi-

ately after it has been blocked or reset, the

side window closes with increased or max-

imum force. The reversing feature is then

not active. Parts of the body could be trap-

ped in the closing area in the process. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in

the closing area. To stop the closing proc-

ess, release the switch or push the switch

again to reopen the side window.

Opening or closing the side windows

The switches for both side windows are loca-

ted on the driver's door. There is also a

switch for the front-passenger side window

on the front-passenger door.

The switch on the driver’s door takes prece-

dence.

Left ; Right X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- tion lock. X To open manually: press and hold the cor- responding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic closing is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X Vehicles with convenience control: To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic closing is started. X To interrupt automatic opening/closing: press/pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance while opening, automatic oper- ation is started. In vehicles with conveni- ence control, you can also start automatic operation when closing. To do so, pull the switch beyond the point of resistance. You can stop automatic operation by oper- ating the switch again. i You can continue to operate the side win- dows after turning the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or removing the key. This function remains active for 3 minutes or until you open a door. 58 Side windows

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Resetting the side windows

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 69 · Applies to: 453

You must reset each side window if: Rthe side window opens again slightly after being closed fully. Rthe side window can no longer be fully opened or closed. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is com- pletely closed (Y page 58). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 58). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Side windows 59

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the side windows

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 70 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X Remove the objects. X Close the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof The roller sunblind shields the vehicle inte- rior from sunlight. X To open: press the roller sunblind up by the outer edge of recess : and slide it back- wards. X To close: pull the roller sunblind forward by the outer edge of recess : until it is fully closed. 60 Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 71 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Correcting the driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Example Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust- ment (Y page 61). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop- erly. Adjusting the seats (Y page 62) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- tion. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 65). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus- ted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel (Y page 65) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 31). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 33). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 66) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unat- tended. There is a risk of injury. Seats 61

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 72 · Applies to: 453

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the back- rest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoul- der. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 34) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 42). ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following informa- tion: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heat- ing should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passen- gers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating mate- rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be dam- aged. Adjusting the seats Illustration of variant 1 62 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Illustration of variant 2

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 73 · Applies to: 453

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Remove the seat belt from the belt loop by opening the press stud. X Lift handle = and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever = again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. Backrest angle Variant 1 X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel : forwards or backwards. Variant 2 X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Pull release lever :. The backrest is released. X Move the backrest forwards or backwards. X Let go of release lever : again. Seat height1 X Only variant 2: pull handle ; up or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Folding down the front-passenger seat You can increase the size of the luggage com- partment by folding the front-passenger seat backrest forwards. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 142) and the notes in the "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" section (Y page 45). Folding down Illustration of variant 1 Illustration of variant 2 Variant 1: X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- most position. X Turn handwheel : forward until the desired seat backrest position is achieved Variant 2: X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- most position. X Hold onto the backrest at the head restraint with one hand. X Pull release lever :. The backrest is released. X Fold the seat forwards. 1 Only driver's seat, depending on equipment. Seats 63

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Folding back

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 74 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the event of an accident. RAs a result, a backrest which is not engaged would press you into the seat belt. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and can even cause injuries. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the trunk. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described. Variant 1: X Turn handwheel : back until the desired seat backrest position is achieved Variant 2: X Pull release lever :. The backrest is released. X Fold the backrest backwards. X Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged again. Switching the seat heating on/off Activating/deactivating G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of per- sons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 87). X To switch on: press button ;. Indicator lamp : in the button lights up. X To switch off: press button ;. Indicator lamp : in the button goes out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. The seat heating switches off automati- cally after about 10 minutes. 64 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the seat heating

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 75 · Applies to: 453

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating has

switched off prema-

turely or cannot be

switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-

sumers are switched on.

X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will

switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you

do the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel

or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirrors and fasten your seat belt before

starting the engine.

G WARNING

Children could injure themselves if they

adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of

injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING

If the steering wheel is unlocked while the

vehicle is in motion, it could change posi-

tion unexpectedly. This could cause you to

lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk

of an accident.

Before starting off, make sure the steering

wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering

wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height X Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Set desired steering wheel height ;. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. To do so, try and push the steering wheel up or down. Steering wheel 65

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mirrors

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 76 · Applies to: 453

Rear-view mirror X Anti-glare mode: pivot anti-glare switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users trav- eling behind by glancing over your shoul- der. Adjusting the exterior mirrors manually X To adjust the mirror: move lever : to the right or left, up or down. Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- cally X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition (Y page 87). X To select an exterior mirror: turn control = to position 1 for the left exterior mir- ror or to position 2 for the right exterior mirror. X To adjust the mirror: move control = to the right or left, up or down. The exterior mirrors can be heated by switch- ing on the rear window heating (Y page 82). Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed for- wards or backwards out of position, push the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. 66 Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 77 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, smart recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, oper- ation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Exterior lighting settings Operation : Combination switch control ; Marking 3$ Lights off 4 T standing lamp, parking lamp, license plate lighting 5 K High-beam headlamps 6 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 7 L Low-beam headlamps D Marking E Combination switch middle ring Ì N Front fog lamps Í R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn combination switch control : until à or $ is at marking ;. When in the à position the exterior light- ing switches off automatically if you: Rswitch off the engine Ropen the driver's door Rlock the vehicle Rdo not switch on the high-beam headlamps Automatic headlamp mode à is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RWith the engine running: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the parking and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automat- ically X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn combination switch control : until à is at marking ;. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather Exterior lighting 67

Lights and windshield wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 78 · Applies to: 453

an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehi- cle's lighting at all times. Low-beam headlamps X To switch on: turn combination switch con- trol : until L is at marking ;. The L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps X To switch on: turn combination switch con- trol : until T is at marking ;. Canada only: the standing lamps are only switched on when the engine is switched off. When the engine is running, the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Front fog lamps Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function. X To switch on: make sure that the standing lamps or low-beam headlamps are switched on. X Turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at N. The N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral position. X To switch off: turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at N. The N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral position. i If you switch off the engine (only in the à position) or turn off the lights, the foglamps are also switched off. Rear fog lamp X To switch on: make sure that the fog lamps or low-beam headlamps are switched on. X Turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at R. The R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral position. X To switch off: turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at R. The R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral position. i If you switch off the engine (only in the à position) or turn off the lights, the rear foglamps are also switched off. Switching on the turn signals X Start the engine. X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (right turn signal) or ; (left turn signal). The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (right turn signal) or ; (left turn signal). 68 Exterior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching on the high-beam headlamps

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 79 · Applies to: 453

and headlamp flasher

High-beam headlamps

X To switch on: start the engine.

X Turn the combination switch control until

K or à (if available) is at the mark-

ing.

X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of

arrow :.

The K indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.

X To deactivate: move combination switch :

back to its normal position.

The K indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes out.

High-beam flasher

X To switch on: pull the combination switch

in the direction of arrow ;.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on if:

Ran air bag is deployed

Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to

a standstill

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on

a turn signal using the combination switch,

only the turn signal lamp on the corre-

sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

The hazard warning lamps switch off automat-

ically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above

6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-

cation.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if

the ignition is switched off.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions

may cause moisture to form in the headlamp.

This moisture does not affect the function-

ality of the headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview

Interior lighting ; Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off = Depending on the position of the switch: Interior lighting switched on Automatic interior lighting control on Interior lighting 69

Lights and windshield wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Interior lighting switched off

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 80 · Applies to: 453

? Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/

off

The interior lighting is switched on when a

door is open: if the corresponding door is

closed correctly the interior lighting goes

out.

Interior lighting control

If the doors are unlocked with the remote con-

trol, the interval timer for the interior

lighting is triggered. The interval timer

restarts when a door is opened.

The front interior lighting and the luggage

compartment light go out gradually.

The interior lighting interval timer is

switched off:

Rif a door remains open, the interior light-

ing switches off after 15 minutes without

dimming

Rif all doors (with additional locking mech-

anism) are closed, the interior lighting

switches off after 15 seconds

Rif all doors (without locking mechanism)

are closed, the interior lighting switches

off after 3 to 4 minutes

Ras soon as the engine is started and for as

long as the engine is running

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

G WARNING

Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very

hot when operating. If you change a bulb,

you could burn yourself on these compo-

nents. There is a risk of injury.

Allow these components to cool down before

changing a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.

The bulb may explode if:

Ryou touch it

Rit is hot

Ryou drop it

Ryou scratch it

Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps

designed for that purpose. Only fit spare

bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-

age.

Marks on the glass tube reduce the service

life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube

with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the

glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit

and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.

Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-

tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact

with liquids.

Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 70).

If you require assistance replacing bulbs,

consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the new bulb still does not light up, consult

a qualified specialist workshop.

The daytime driving lights and part of the

rear light clusters of your vehicle are equip-

ped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace these

bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified special-

ist workshop which has the necessary spe-

cialist knowledge and tools to carry out the

work required.

Headlamps and lamps are an important aspect

of vehicle safety. You must therefore make

sure that these function correctly at all

times. Have the headlamp setting checked

regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb

type can be found in the legend.

Low-beam/high-beam headlamps: HB2 ; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W = Foglamps: H16 70 Replacing bulbs

Lights and windshield wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tail lamp

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 81 · Applies to: 453

Tail lamp/brake lamp/side marker lamp:

P 21 5 W

; Rear fog lamp: P 21 W

= Backup lamp: W 16 W

? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

Tail lamps (vehicles with partial LEDs)

Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

; Backup lamp: W 16 W

License plate lighting: W 5 W

Side turn signal lamps: WY 5 W

Interior lighting: W 5 W Changing the front bulbs Important safety notes G WARNING The radiator fan may continue to run after the engine has been switched off or start without warning. There is a risk of injury. If you need to operate in the front area: Rswitch off the ignition Rtake off jewelry and watches Rnever reach into the fan rotation area Rkeep clothing and hair, for example, away from the fan. Replacing bulbs 71

Lights and windshield wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Turn signal

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 82 · Applies to: 453

X To remove the cover in the front wheel arch: switch off the lighting system. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Press spring clip : down. X Slide cover ; back and remove it. X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and remove. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X To fit the cover in the front wheel arch: insert cover ; again and lock in place. Low-beam/high-beam headlamps X Switch off the lights. X Open the service cover (Y page 151). X Remove cover :. X Pull out the connector. X Simultaneously press retainer ; forward and to the right and then remove the lamp. X Insert the new bulb and engage it in place. X Insert the connector. X Position cover : and press into place. Front fog lamps Due to their location, have the bulbs in the front fog lamps changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. X Switch off the lights. X Remove the two screws : at the bottom of the front wheel arch using a suitable tool. X Bend back the cover using your hand. X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. X Take the bulb out of the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise until it engages. 72 Replacing bulbs

Lights and windshield wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Bend the cover back into position.

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 83 · Applies to: 453

X Tighten the two screws : again.

Side turn signal lamps

X Insert a flat tool into recess : and lever

side turn signal lamp ; forwards and out.

X Remove the bulb holder from side turn sig-

nal lamp ; by turning it a quarter turn

anti-clockwise.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder into side turn signal

lamp ; and turn it a quarter turn clock-

wise.

X Insert side turn signal lamp ;.

Changing the rear bulbs

Tail lamp

X Switch off the lights.

X To remove: open the upper and lower tail-

gate (Y page 57).

X Remove two screws : on the tail lamp using

a suitable slotted screwdriver.

X Carefully take out the lamp.

X To release the connector: insert a suitable

slotted screwdriver under the plastic

hanger, lift a small plastic piece upwards

and remove the connector.

Bulb holder

Tail lamp/brake lamp/side marker lamps (only vehicles without partial LEDs) ; Turn signal = Backup lamp ? Rear foglamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) X Unclip four bulb holder tabs A and care- fully remove the bulb holder. X Pull out the corresponding bulb. X Insert the new bulb. X Re-install bulb holder. Four bulb holder tabs A must audibly engage. X Insert the connector. X Insert the lamp again. X Tighten the two screws : on the tail lamp again. Replacing bulbs 73

Lights and windshield wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

License plate lamp

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 84 · Applies to: 453

X Toremove: release catch : of thelamp lens using a suitable tool. X Remove the lamp lens. X Take bulb : out of the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Re-insert the lamp lens into the license plate lamp. Replacing the interior lighting X Remove lamp lens : with a flat tool, e.g. a screwdriver. X Take the bulb to be replaced out of the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Insert lamp lens :. Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the wind- shield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. ! Make sure that the front windshield wip- ers are free of ice. The wiper motor could otherwise overheat. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- shield becomes dirty in dry weather con- ditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. 74 Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Combination switch

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 85 · Applies to: 453

Control for wiping frequency and sensi-

tivity of the rain sensor

2 0 Windshield wipers off

3 © Intermittent wipe

à Automatic wipe (rain sensor)

4 1 Continuous wipe, slow

5 2 Continuous wipe, fast

B î Wipes with washer fluid

X To switch on: turn the key to position 1 or 2

in the ignition lock (Y page 87).

X Press the combination switch to the ©

position or 1.

or

X Start the engine (Y page 87).

X Press the combination switch down or up to

the corresponding position.

X To wipe with washer fluid î: pull the

combination switch towards the steering

wheel.

X To switch off: press the combination switch

to position 0.

Position 2 changes to position 1 when the

engine is stopped.

In position 1 or in the © position, the

windshield wipers stop automatically when

the engine is stopped and the driver's door is

opened.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in position Ã

the windshield wipers stop automatically

when the engine is stopped.

The windshield will no longer be wiped prop-

erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could

prevent you from observing the traffic con-

ditions.

Intermittent wipe

Vehicles with a rain sensor: the appropriate

wiping frequency is automatically set

according to the intensity of the rain. With

intermittent wiping you can also adjust the

sensitivity of the rain sensor using con-

trol :. When the sensitivity is set to high,

the windshield wiper wipes more frequently.

X To switch on: start the engine (Y page 87).

X Press the combination switch to the Ã

position.

The windshield wipers sweep once.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch

Control 2 $ Rear window wiper off 3 è Rear window wiper on 4 ô Wiping with washer fluid X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 87). X Turn control : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Windshield wipers 75

Lights and windshield wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Always switch off the windshield wipers

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 86 · Applies to: 453

and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. ! Never open the service cover/tailgate if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/rear window. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/ rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. smart recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Changing the windshield wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 87). X Press the combination switch to the 5 position (Y page 74). The wiper arms move slowly upwards. X When the wiper arms are vertical in rela- tion to the service cover, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- shield. X Press the two release clips ; on mount- ing ? in the direction of arrow = and pull away from the wiper arm. X Slide wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A until the wiper blade securing hook is revealed. X Remove wiper blade :. Installing the wiper blades X Slide new wiper blade : in the direction of arrow ? onto mounting = of wiper arm ;. Wiper blade : engages. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold wiper arm ; back onto the wind- shield. Replacing the rear window wiper blade Removing a wiper blade X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win- dow until it engages. 76 Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Pull wiper blade ; in the direction of the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 87 · Applies to: 453

arrow until it is released from the retainer on the wiper arm. X Remove wiper blade ;. Installing a wiper blade X Push new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm : until you feel it engage. X Turn wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win- dow. Windshield wipers 77

Lights and windshield wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the windshield wipers

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 88 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers do not stop or continue wiping with the same speed regardless of a change in position. The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as you do so and switch off the engine. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock and open the driver's door. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Then try to start the engine again. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as you do so and switch off the engine. X For safety reasons, you should remove the Smart Key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers on again after 30 seconds. The windshield wiper has stopped in the mid- dle of the windshield. The windshield wiper drive has stopped for safety reasons. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 78 Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 89 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the fol- lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidi- fication function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Automatic climate control regulates the tem- perature and the humidity of the vehicle interior. Italso filters undesirable substan- ces out of the air. Automatic climate control is only available when the engine is running. Optimum opera- tion is only achieved with the side windows closed. i When the weather is warm, ventilate the vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up the cooling process, and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and pollen. It also reduces odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle inte- rior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the fil- ter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. Overview of climate control systems 79

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic climate control panel

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 90 · Applies to: 453

Increases the airflow (Y page 82) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 82) = Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 84) ? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 82) Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mirrors only) A Sets the air distribution (Y page 81) B Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 81) C Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 80) D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 81) E Reduces the airflow (Y page 82) F Sets the temperature (Y page 81) Optimum use of automatic climate con- trol Automatic climate control Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- ommendations to help you use climate control optimally. RActivate climate control primarily using the à button. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield demisting" func- tion briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. Operating the climate control systems Switching the climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. Switching the sound on/off X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 87). X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp under the à button lights up. or X Press the ó button. or X Press the ¬ button. 80 Operating the climate control systems

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To switch off: press the ^ button.

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 91 · Applies to: 453

The indicator lamp under the ^ button lights up. or X Press the ô button repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Switching cooling with air dehumidi- fication on/off General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- midification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifi- cation function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the tempera- ture selected. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function does not function when the outside temperature is low. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a mal- function. Switching on/off X Start the engine (Y page 87). X To activate: press the ó and ¿ but- tons. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. Setting climate control to automatic General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the air- flow and the air distribution according to the temperature. Automatic control X Turn the ignition key to position 1 or 2 or start the engine (Y page 87). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. X To switch to manual mode: press the ó or ô button. or X Press the Á, P or O button. or X Press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. i If you manually change one of the func- tions, the indicator lamp in the à but- ton goes out. All further functions will still be automatically controlled. Setting the temperature X Start the engine (Y page 87). X To increase or reduce: push temperature slide F to the right or left (Y page 80). Push slide F all the way to the right or left (Y page 80). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings Á Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs the airflow to the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents i You can also activate several air distri- bution settings simultaneously. To do this, press multiple air distribution buttons. The air is then directed through various vents. Operating the climate control systems 81

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Recommendation for air distribution in

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 92 · Applies to: 453

winter: set to Á and O. Recommendation for air distribution in summer: set to P . Setting the air distribution X Start the engine (Y page 87). X Press one or more of the Á, P and O buttons. The indicator lamp next to the selected button lights up. Setting the airflow X Start the engine (Y page 87). X To increase: press the ó button. Each time the ó button is pressed, one of the indicator lamps next to the airflow but- tons lights up. X To reduce: press the ô button. Each time the ô button is pressed, one of the indicator lamps next to the airflow but- tons goes out. Defrosting the windshield General notes You can use this function to defrost the wind- shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside. i You should only select the "Windshield defrosting" function until the windshield is clear again. Switching on/off X Turn the ignition key to position 1 or 2 or start the engine (Y page 87). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button lights up. The à automatic mode is deactivated. The ¬ "Defrosting the windshield" function switches automatic climate con- trol to the following functions: Rcooling with air dehumidification on Rhigh airflow Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. or X Press the à button. or X Press the À button. or X Press the Á, P or O button. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button goes out. Demisting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu- midification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion ¬. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Set the air distribution to ¬. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. The rear window defroster can only be switched on or off while the engine is run- ning. The rear window defroster switches off auto- matically after approximately 10 minutes. Vehicles with heated exterior mirrors: the exterior mirrors will also be heated when you switch on the rear window defroster. The mir- 82 Operating the climate control systems

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ror heating is switched off together with the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 93 · Applies to: 453

rear window defroster. Switching on/off X Start the engine (Y page 87). X To activate: press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp above the ¤ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp above the ¤ button goes out. Operating the climate control systems 83

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the rear window defroster

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 94 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window defroster has deacti- vated prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. Switching the air-recirculation mode on/off General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air tem- porarily if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside or if you are driving through a tunnel. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in partic- ular at low temperatures. Only use air-recir- culation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. Switching on/off X Start the engine (Y page 87). X To activate: press the À button. The indicator lamp above the À button lights up. X To deactivate: press the À button. or X Press the ¬ button. or X Press the à button. The indicator lamp above the À button goes out. Setting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. G WARNING If you spray cleaning products or disin- fectant into the ventilation system of the vehicle, this could ignite. There is a risk of fire. Never spray these or any other substances into the ventilation system. Always have work on the ventilation system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle inte- rior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the service cover and the windshield free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. i For optimum climate control in the vehi- cle, open the air vents fully. 84 Setting the air vents

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting the center air vents

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 95 · Applies to: 453

X To adjust the air direction: hold center air vent : or ; in the middle and turn and/or tilt it in the desired direction up, down, to the left or to the right. X To close the center air vent: hold center air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt inwards until the vent openings can no longer be seen. X To open the center air vent: hold center air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt out- wards until the vent openings can be seen. Setting the side air vents X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ; in the middle and turn and/or tilt in the desired direction up, down, to the left or to the right. X To close the side air vent: hold side air vent ; in the middle and tilt inwards until the vent openings can no longer be seen. X To open the side air vent: hold side air vent ; in the middle and tilt outwards until the vent openings can be seen. Demister vent : cannot be adjusted. Setting the air vents 85

Climate control. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 96 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety sys- tems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after sev- eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- cle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tach- ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RVehicles with automatic transmission: if possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kick- down). RVehicles with automatic transmission: ideally, for the first 1000 miles(1500 km), drive in program E (Comfort). After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on run- ning-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Observe the maximum permissible speed. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driv- ing, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power 86 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

steering and the brake boosting effect. You

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 97 · Applies to: 453

will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehi- cle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. SmartKey positions g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 Starting the engine The steering is locked when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehi- cle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poi- soning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ven- tilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system Driving 87

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

or parts of the engine that heat up. There is

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 98 · Applies to: 453

a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. i During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic con- verter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Manual transmission X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to neutral. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 92). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 92). i You can start the engine in transmission positions P and N. In order to start the engine in transmission position N you must depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Starting procedure X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 87) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Pulling away General notes G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission posi- tion D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. ! Vehicles with manual transmission: change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. You could otherwise dam- age the vehicle. ! Release the parking brake before driving off. The parking brake can otherwise over- heat, malfunction and wear out quickly. Accelerate gently when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 55). Vehicles with automatic transmission: you can only shift the transmission from position P to the desired transmission position if: Rthe ignition is switched on Ryou depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed and Ryou press release button on the selector lever (Y page 92). Only then is the shift lock released. i Vehicles with automatic transmission: transmission shifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its oper- ating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll 88 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

away. There is a risk of an accident and

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 99 · Applies to: 453

injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou pull away on level ground Ryou pull away in a forward gear on a down- hill slope Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning Driving 89

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the engine

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 100 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Switch off the engine before attempting to start the engine again (Y page 101). X Try to start the engine again (Y page 87). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 168). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not run- ning smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechan- ical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con- verter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant tempera- ture exceeds 230 ‡ (110 †). The red coolant temperature warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The Stop Switch Off Engine message appears. The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 153). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. 90 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Manual transmission

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 101 · Applies to: 453

Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. ! When shifting into 5th gear, you should always push the gear lever all the way to the right. You could otherwise shift uninten- tionally into 3rd gear and damage the transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- mission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. 1 - 5 Forward gears k Reverse gear Shifting to neutral X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Move the gearshift lever to position :. Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. All vehicles except for smart 66 kw Turbo X Shift to neutral (Y page 91). X Press the gear lever to the right and then pull it back. smart 66 kw Turbo X Shift to neutral (Y page 91). X Pull collar : upwards. X Press the gear lever to the right and then pull it back. Shift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. Manual transmission 91

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Shift one gear up or down according to

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 102 · Applies to: 453

gearshift recommendation : when shown

in the multifunction display of the instru-

ment cluster.

Further information on the transmission dis-

play (Y page 111).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling

speed and you engage transmission posi-

tion D or R, the vehicle could pull away

suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or

R, always firmly depress the brake pedal

and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to

neutral position N when you switch off the

engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is

a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always

switch to parking position P. Prevent the

parked vehicle from rolling away by apply-

ing the parking brake.

Selector lever

j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear

i Neutral

h Drive

X To shift transmission position: press

release button : and shift the gear lever

to the desired transmission position.

When you shift the transmission from posi-

tions N or P to position R, the ignition must

also be switched on.

i When you shift the transmission from

positions D or R to position N, you do not

need to press release button :.

Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display

The current transmission position and drive

program appear in the multifunction display.

Transmission position display ; Drive program display 92 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Transmission positions

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 103 · Applies to: 453

B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P (Y page 92) when the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. The key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked. In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the trans- mission may lock. Information on manually disconnecting the selec- tor lever lock (Y page 97). Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a quali- fied specialist workshop. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is sta- tionary. A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the parking brake and brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. If esp® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can dam- age the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program: Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the auto- matic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Automatic transmission 93

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Kickdown

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 104 · Applies to: 453

If you want maximum acceleration, use kick- down: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Rocking the vehicle free Shifting the transmission repeatedly between gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. X Shift the selector lever alternately between positions D and R. The vehicle's engine management system lim- its the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifting back and forth. Program selector button The program selector button allows you to choose between drive programs with differ- ent driving characteristics. The automatic transmission switches to drive program E (Comfort) every time the engine is started. X Press program selector button : to change the drive program. The letter of the selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. E (Comfort) Comfortable, economical driving S (Dynamic) Dynamic, agile driving More information on drive programs (Y page 94). Drive programs Drive program E (Comfort) Drive program E (Comfort) is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S (Dynamic) Drive program S (Dynamic) is characterized by the following: Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points Manual gearshifting General notes You can shift the gears manually using either the selector lever or the shift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. If it is permissible, the automatic transmis- sion shifts to the next highest or next lowest gear. To use manual gearshifting, you have two pos- sibilities: Rlong-term setting Rshort-term setting (vehicles with Sports package) 94 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If you activate the manual gearshift setting,

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 105 · Applies to: 453

the currently selected gear is shown in the multifunction display instead of D. Long-term setting X To activate: shift the selector lever to D. X Push the selector lever to the left. X To deactivate: push the selector lever to the right. Short-term setting (vehicles with Sports package) X To activate: shift the selector lever to D. X Pull shift paddle : or ;. The short-term setting remains active for a certain length of time. Under certain condi- tions this minimum time is increased, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or while driving on steep ter- rain. X To deactivate: pull and hold shift pad- dle ;. or X Change the transmission position with the selector lever. or X Change the drive program with the program selector button. Shifting with the selector lever X To shift up: push the selector lever in the q direction. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. To prevent engine damage the automatic transmission shifts up automatically: Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur- rently engaged gear is reached and Ryou continue to accelerate. X To shift down: pull the selector lever in the ± direction. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Downshifting occurs automatically while coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. Automatic transmission 95

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Shifting with shift paddles (vehicles

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 106 · Applies to: 453

with Sports package) X To shift up: pull shift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. To prevent engine damage the automatic transmission shifts up automatically: Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur- rently engaged gear is reached and Ryou continue to accelerate. X To shift down: pull shift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Downshifting occurs automatically while coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. Shift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. X Shift one gear up or down according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instru- ment cluster. Further information on the transmission dis- play (Y page 111). Kickdown If you want maximum acceleration, you can also change the kickdown to be manually switched on: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. i If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. 96 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the transmission

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 107 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately. The acceleration abil- ity is deteriorating. The transmission no longer shifts into all of the gears. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged. The transmission is in emergency mode. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately. Manually releasing the selector lever lock You can manually release the selector level lock in the event of an electrical malfunc- tion. This is the case, for example, when you want to release the parking brake while tow- ing away the vehicle and then apply it again. ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to prise out the cover from the center console. Otherwise, the cover or the center console could be damaged. X Apply the parking brake. X Prise out cover : at lower edge ; with a flat, blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrap- ped in cloth). X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up and simultaneously press release button ? on the selector lever. X Shift the selector lever to N or P. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. Refueling 97

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 108 · Applies to: 453

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or cloth-

ing and that it is not swallowed. Do not

inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from

children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance

without delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vom-

iting.

RImmediately change out of clothing

which has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING

Electrostatic buildup can create sparks

and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of

fire and explosion.

Always touch the vehicle body before open-

ing the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel

pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic

buildup is thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the

refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic

charge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-

tion if you accidentally refuel with the

wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter

the fuel system. Even small amounts of the

wrong fuel could result in damage to the

fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-

fied specialist workshop and have the fuel

tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage

the fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted

surfaces. You could otherwise damage the

paintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel

can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or

injection system could be blocked by par-

ticles from the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray

out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel qual-

ity (Y page 207).

Refueling

General information

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked

automatically when you lock or unlock the

vehicle with the key.

The position of the fuel filler cap is dis-

played 8 in the instrument cluster. The

arrow next to the filling pump indicates the

side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

Opening the fuel filler flap ; Attaches the fuel filler cap = Fuel type instruction label X Switch the engine off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Open the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Hang the fuel filler cap on the hook on the inside of the fuel filler flap. 98 Refueling

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Completely insert the filler neck of the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 109 · Applies to: 453

fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multi- function display (Y page 125). In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 136). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 136). Refueling 99

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with fuel and fuel tank

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 110 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 87). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 51). The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the key element in the emergency lock (Y page 55). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- rials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehi- cle or its drivetrain could be damaged. 100 Parking

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 111 · Applies to: 453

rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. Ra gear must be engaged on vehicles with manual transmission. Rthe selector lever must be in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the curb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by apply- ing the parking brake. Vehicles with manual transmission X Select a gear. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X Apply the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. The key can only be removed if the trans- mission is in position P. Parking brake General notes G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the park- ing brake, the braking distance is consid- erably longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the brake lamps will not light up. Parking 101

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To apply: firmly pull parking brake ;

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 112 · Applies to: 453

upwards. When the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press release button : on parking brake ; and guide the parking brake down to the stop. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The parking brake is not yet engaged if: Ra warning tone sounds RThe Release Parking Brake message appears in the multifunction display and Rthe J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work- shop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driv- ing, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be dis- tracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehi- cle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the coun- try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before using the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RHave all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driv- ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina- 102 Driving tips

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 113 · Applies to: 453

drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poi- soning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ven- tilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. There- fore, only allow qualified and authorized technicians to perform work on the engine. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be performed at regular intervals and in accordance with smart service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of the engine's braking effect. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out exces- sively. When you take advantage of the engine's braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur- face. This could cause damage to the drive train, which is not covered by the smart warranty. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping dis- tance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehi- cle has been washed or driven through deep water. You then have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them Driving tips 103

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

more quickly and protecting them against

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 114 · Applies to: 453

corrosion. Limited braking performance on salt- treated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly lon- ger braking distance. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immedi- ately. Consult a qualified specialist work- shop to arrange this. ! A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamome- ter. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ! As the ESP® system operates automati- cally, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi- tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if: Rthe parking brake is tested using a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds). Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle raised. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the function- ality of your brakes at regular intervals. When having brake pads/linings fitted, smart recommends that you only use those which are approved for smart vehicles or are of an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/ linings which have not been approved for smart vehicles or which are not of an equiv- alent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. smart recommends that you only use brake fluid which is approved for smart vehicles or is of an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for smart vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydro- planing occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following man- ner: Rlower your speed. Ravoid ruts. Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully. Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum per- missible water depth to be exceeded. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems and transmission. 104 Driving tips

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Prevent water from entering the vehicle inte-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 115 · Applies to: 453

rior or the engine compartment. If you must drive through standing water, bear in mind that: Rthe water level should not exceed the lower edge of the vehicle body in still water Ryou should drive no faster than at walking pace. Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you have to leave the engine running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle free of snow. To ensure an ade- quate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a quali- fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- ter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steer- ing and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Try to bring the vehicle under control using corrective steering. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are dis- played after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freez- ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 179). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 179). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 179). Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. Cruise control does not brake the vehicle automatically. Only the engine's braking effect is available. In order to reduce speed and maintain distance to other road users, you need to brake yourself. This interrupts cruise control. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can use cruise control at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- ing in lane. Driving systems 105

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not use cruise control:

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 116 · Applies to: 453

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.

in heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheels

to lose traction and the vehicle could then

skid

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to

fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control buttons

Activates/deactivates cruise control ; Stores, increases or reduces the current speed = Calls up the last speed stored ? Interrupts cruise control Activating cruise control Cruise control must be activated before it can be used. X Press switch : (ON). Cruise control is activated. The V symbol appears in the multifunc- tion display. i When you switch off the engine, cruise control remains activated and the last speed stored is cleared. Storing and maintaining the current speed While cruise control is active, you can set the current speed starting from 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Press switch ; (®) and release it. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. V SET is shown in the multifunction display. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. On downhill gradients, only the engine's braking effect is available. You have to operate the brakes yourself to reduce speed. This interrupts cruise control. Calling up the last speed stored G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is different to the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate. If you are not aware of the stored speed, the vehicle may accelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Pay attention to the road and traffic con- ditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X Press button = ° and release it. Cruise control is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. Increasing or decreasing the speed In order to be able to increase or decrease the speed, a speed must already have been stored. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have fin- ished overtaking. 106 Driving systems

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

R®: increases the speed

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 117 · Applies to: 453

R−: decreases the speed X Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. The speed is gradually increased or reduced. or X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−) until the desired speed is reached. X Release the switch. The new speed is stored. Interrupting cruise control When cruise control is switched on, you can cancel cruise control at any time and call up the stored speed again later. i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. X Press button ? ± and release it. or X Brake. Cruise control is interrupted. Cruise control is also canceled when: Ryou engage the parking brake Ryou depress the clutch Resp® intervenes Deactivating cruise control X Press switch : (OFF). Cruise control is deactivated. The V symbol goes out in the multifunc- tion display. Parking aid General notes The rear parking aid uses an acoustic signal to indicate the distance between your vehicle and an obstacle. If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated automatically. The parking aid uses three sensors : in the rear bumper to monitor the area behind your vehicle. The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, tak- ing care not to scratch or damage them. When reverse gear is engaged the system measures the distance between your vehicle and an object. If the proximity to the object behind the vehicle is less than 4.0 ft (1.20 m) a beeping sound is issued. As the distance to the object decreases the frequency increa- ses. When the object is a maximum of 1.0 ft (30 cm) a continuous tone is issued. Important safety notes The parking aid feature is only intended as an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. The park- ing aid does not detect such objects if they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehi- cle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause the park- ing aid to malfunction. The parking aid may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Driving systems 107

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The parking aid does not take into account

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 118 · Applies to: 453

obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang- ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Deactivating/activating the parking aid X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The system is deactivated. X Press button ; again. Indicator lamp : goes out. The system is reactivated. i The parking aid is automatically activa- ted when you start the engine. If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated auto- matically. An acoustic signal sounds when reverse gear is selected. If reverse gear is no longer engaged, the parking aid is deactivated. 108 Driving systems

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 119 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be dis- tracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traf- fic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle pay- ing attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv- ing when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows display messages and/or warnings from certain sys- tems in the display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, you may cause an acci- dent by driving a vehicle that is not operat- ing reliably. If the operating safety of your vehicle impaired, park the vehicle as soon as possi- ble paying attention to road and traffic con- ditions. Contact a qualified specialist work- shop. Read and follow the notes in the overview of warning and indicator lamps in the instru- ment cluster (Y page 24). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting Instrument cluster lighting includes illumi- nation of the instrument cluster, the addi- tional instruments on the dashboard, the dis- plays and the controls. The instrument cluster lighting is switched automatically between day and night lighting depending on the ambient light conditions (Y page 67). You can additionally set the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting to different lev- els in the on-board computer (Y page 115). Speedometer If you turn the key to position 2 in the igni- tion lock, the warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster will briefly light up for a lamp test. During the lamp test, the illuminated speedometer needle moves in the speedometer. The display can show a digital speedometer. The digital speedometer can be hidden/ displayed and its speed unit selected (Y page 115). Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature is displayed on the far right in the top bar. Displays and operation 109

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 120 · Applies to: 453

played after a short delay.

You can set the temperature unit of the out-

door temperature display (Y page 116).

Fuel gauge

Fuel gauge

Reserve fuel display ; Fuel gauge = Fuel filler flap location indicator u The fuel filler cap is located on the right ? 6 Reserve fuel (yellow) Fuel gauge ; is shown in the display as a segment display with eight segments. When the fuel level falls below the reserve range of 5.0 l, the last illuminated segment of the fuel display will flash and a warning tone will sound. Reserve fuel display : will also appear. The reserve fuel display shows the numeric value of the remaining fuel level in 0.5 l increments. In addition: R6 symbol ? also appears in yellow Ra display message is also shown (Y page 125). Dashboard instruments ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. H Environmental note Avoid driving at high engine speeds. This unnecessarily increases the fuel consump- tion of your vehicle and harms the envi- ronment as a result of increased emissions. The overrevving range of the engine is shown with dashed lines in the orange marking of rev counter :. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the overrevving range is reached. Dashboard clock ; is synchronized with the clock in the on-board computer. Rev counter :, together with dashboard clock ;, can be rotated approximately 60° on the dashboard. You can additionally set the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting to different lev- els (Y page 115). 110 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating the on-board computer

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 121 · Applies to: 453

Color display

; Left control panel

X To activate the on-board computer: unlock

the vehicle and open a door.

If you do not subsequently lock the door, the

on-board computer will remain active for

approximately 15 minutes without any fur-

ther activity.

or

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.

You can control the display and the settings

in the on-board computer using the steering

wheel buttons on left control panel ;.

Left control panel ;

9

:

Press briefly:

RTo scroll through a menu

RTo scroll through a sub-menu or

list

Press and hold:

RTo switch directly to the Dis‐

tance menu at menu level

RTo switch directly to the back

function at the submenu level

a

RConfirms your selection

RIn certain menus, switches to the

Reset Values? function

RHides the display message

Display

Time (Y page 114) ; SET = Digital speedometer (Y page 115) ? Outside temperature display (Y page 109) A Display field for display messages, menus and lists B 6 Reserve fuel display (Y page 110) C 6 Fuel level (Y page 110) D Transmission display Vehicles with manual transmission: ¿ Standard display Vehicles with automatic transmission: h Standard display with drive program or = Gear indicator (manual mode) u Vehicles with manual transmission: gearshift recommendation (Y page 91) S Transmission malfunction (Y page 97) E V Cruise control (Y page 105) Menus and sub menus Menu overview Picture the arrangement of the menus and dis- plays as a circle. At the menu level, a segment display is shown on the right side of the display to help nav- igation. The segment marked corresponds with the list position of the menu in the fol- lowing list. For long lists within the menus and submenus, a scroll bar on the right side of the display serves to assist orientation. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 111). Menus and sub menus 111

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 122 · Applies to: 453

call up the following menus one after the

other:

RDistance menu (Y page 112)

Rfrom Start trip computer menu

(Y page 112)

Rfrom Reset trip computer menu

(Y page 112)

RFuel consumption menu (Y page 112)

RCoolant Temperature menu (Y page 113)

RMessages and Service menu (Y page 113)

RSettings menu (Y page 114)

Odometer menu

Example: distance

X To show: press the 9 or : button on

the steering wheel to select the trip meter

display.

The display shows trip meter : and total

distance recorder ;.

X To reset the data: press the a button on

the steering wheel.

X Press the 9 or : button to select yes

and press the a button to confirm.

The trip meter is reset.

You can change the unit for the trip meter in

the Display submenu (Y page 116).

Trip computer menu "From start" or

"From reset"

Example: trip computer "From start"

Elapsed time ; Distance = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X To display: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the from Start or from Reset trip computer menu. The data in the from Start trip computer menu refers to the start of the journey. The data in the from Reset trip computer sub- menu refers to the last time the submenu was reset. The from Start trip computer is automati- cally reset when: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than 4 hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. The from Reset trip computer is automati- cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles. The unit of distance for the journey, speed and consumption information can be changed in the Display submenu (Y page 116). Fuel consumption menu Example: fuel consumption 112 Menus and sub menus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Press the 9 or : button on the steer-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 123 · Applies to: 453

ing wheel to select the display of current fuel consumption. The display shows the fuel consumption over the previous 15 minutes as a bar chart. The display additionally shows the current fuel consumption as a numeric value in the upper right section of the display. If you switch off the ignition, or change the distance unit, the fuel consumption data is deleted automatically. You can change the distance unit in the Dis‐ play submenu (Y page 116). Coolant temperature menu Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant tem- perature may rise to 230 ‡ (110 †). Example: coolant temperature X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the coolant temperature display. The display shows the current coolant tem- perature as a bar in the range between 50 and 110 †. If the coolant temperature rises above 110 †, then the display shows a display message (Y page 125). Observe the display message. You could otherwise damage the engine. You can change the temperature unit in the Display submenu (Y page 116). Messages and service menu Example: messages and service If you have hidden display messages these are saved in the message memory. The menu shows the number of display messages in message memory : and next service due date ; (Y page 153). The message memory can only be called up when the ignition is switched on. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Messages and Ser‐ vice menu. The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the next service due date. If there are no display messages, then the value in brackets is 0 and the information on the a button is hidden. X To show display messages: press the a button on the steering wheel. The lower area on the right of the display shows the display message, its list number and then number of display messages in the message memory. X Press 9 to scroll through the display messages in the message memory. Pressing : only allows you to scroll back to messages which have already been read. If you scroll back from the first display message using :, the Messages and Service menu will again be shown in the display. Existing display messages are not shown. Menus and sub menus 113

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Settings menu

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 124 · Applies to: 453

Introduction In the Settings menu, as well as in its sub- menus, a navigation bar is also shown at the top of the display field. The navigation bar serves for quick orientation and shows the navigation path to the current selection shown in the display (submenu/function). The selection shown in the display is highlighted in the navigation path. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call up the following submenus in the Set‐ tings menu: RTime submenu (Y page 114) For vehicles with a smart Media-System, the time is set using the smart Media-Sys- tem. - Sets the time and the time format (12/24 h) RDisplay submenu (Y page 115) - Adjusts the instrument cluster lighting - Shows and sets the digital speedometer - Sets the units for distance and tempera- ture RAmbient Lighting submenu (Y page 116) - Sets and switches the ambient lighting on/off RTire Pressure Monitor submenu - Restarts the tire pressure monitor (Y page 185) RLanguage (Language) submenu (Y page 117) - Sets the menu language The Settings menu and some submenus also show the back function. If the back function is shown, you have to select the function to leave the menu. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. This exits the menu, and the display shows the next higher menu level. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Time submenu Introduction This submenu is not available on vehicles with a smart Media-System. You set the time using the smart Media-System. The Time submenu offers the following options: RSetting the time RSetting the time format (12/24 h) X To leave the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Setting the time X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Time submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Set Clock and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to set the hour and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to set the minutes and confirm with a. The time is set and the display shows the Time submenu. i If you are setting the time and keep the 9 or : button depressed, then the numerical value changes continuously. Setting the time format (12/24 h) X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and 114 Menus and sub menus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

press a on the steering wheel to con-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 125 · Applies to: 453

firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Time submenu and confirm with a. X Press 9 or : to select Time Format (12/24 h) and confirm with a. X Press 9 or : to select the desired time format 24 Hours or 12 Hours (am/pm) and confirm with a. The time format is accepted and the display shows the Time submenu. Display submenu Introduction In the Display submenu, you can call up the following submenus: RBrightness Display/Switches submenu (Y page 115) - Adjusting the instrument cluster light- ing RDigital Speedometer submenu, see (Y page 115) - Shows and sets the digital speedometer RUnits of Distance submenu (Y page 116) - Setting the units of distance RUnits of Temperature submenu (Y page 116) - Setting the units of temperature X To leave the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting Instrument cluster lighting includes illumi- nation of the instrument cluster, the addi- tional instruments on the dashboard, the dis- plays and the controls. You can set the brightness of the instrument cluster to different levels with the Bright‐ ness Display/Switches function. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brightness Display/Switches and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to set the brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to dimmed instrument lighting and level 5 to bright instrument lighting. With the selection during night-time driv- ing, the instrument cluster brightness level is set at the same time. X Press the a button to confirm the set- ting. The instrument lighting is set and the dis- play shows the Display submenu. Digital speedometer submenu In the Digital Speedometer submenu you have the following options: Rshowing/hiding the digital speedometer Rsetting the unit for speed in the digital speedometer X To call up the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Digital Speedometer submenu and con- firm with a. X To show/hide the digital speedometer: press the 9 or : button to select the On function. X Activate or deactivate the On function by pressing the a button. When the function is highlighted, it is activated and the display shows the digital speedometer (Y page 111). X To set the unit of speed: press the 9 or : button to select Unit and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the unit of speed km/h or mph and confirm with a. The display shows the Digital Speedome‐ ter submenu. Menus and sub menus 115

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To leave the submenu: press the 9

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 126 · Applies to: 453

or : button to select the back function and confirm with a. The display shows the Display submenu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Setting the unit of measurement for dis- tance If you change the unit of measurement for distance, the values in the: Rtrip computer "From start" or "From reset" (Y page 112) RFuel consumption (Y page 112) menus are also reset automatically. You can only set the unit of measurement for distance when the vehicle is stationary. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Units of Distance and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Kilometers or Miles as the unit of meas- urement for distance and press a to confirm. The display shows the Display submenu. The selected unit of measurement for dis- tance applies as the basis for: Rthe trip computer Rthe service display Rthe fuel consumption display Rthe total distance recorder and the trip meter display Rthe cruise control speed display Setting the temperature unit You can switch the display of the outside tem- perature and the coolant temperature between † and ‡. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Units of Temperature and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the unit of temperature °C or °F and confirm with a. The display shows the Display submenu. Ambient lighting submenu Introduction In the Ambient Lighting submenu you have the following options: Rswitching the ambient lighting on/off Rsetting the brightness of the ambient lighting to different levels X To leave the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Switching the ambient lighting on/off X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ambient Lighting submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select the on function. X Activate or deactivate the on function by pressing the a button. When the function is highlighted it is activated and the ambient lighting is switched on. To set the brightness You can set the brightness of the ambient lighting to different levels. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and 116 Menus and sub menus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

press a on the steering wheel to con-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 127 · Applies to: 453

firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ambient Lighting submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. You will see the selected setting. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brightness and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to set the brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to dimmed ambient lighting and level 5 to bright ambient lighting. With the selection, the ambient lighting brightness level is set at the same time. X Press the a button to save the setting. The brightness of the ambient lighting is set and the display shows the Ambient Lighting submenu. Language submenu X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Use 9 or : to select the Language (Language) submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired language for the displays and mes- sages and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. The display shows the Settings menu in the selected language. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Menus and sub menus 117

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 128 · Applies to: 453

Introduction Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. The display shows high-priority messages in red. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. You can use the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to hide low-priority mes- sages. The display messages are stored in the message memory and can be called up as for as long as the ignition remains switched on (Y page 113). When the ignition is turned off, the message memory is deleted and no display messages are stored. The cause of a display message should be remedied as soon as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. 118 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety systems

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 129 · Applies to: 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 Malfunction Visit Workshop The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 29). Electronics Mal‐ function Stop See Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, ò and $ (USA) or ÷! and J (Canada) warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are malfunctioning. This means that Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Release Parking Brake You are driving with the parking brake engaged. X Release the parking brake. Display messages 119

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 130 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Brake Force Distri‐ bution Inoperative Stop See Operator's Manual In addition, the $ (USA) or J warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 120 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 131 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ò(USA only)!(Canada only) System Inoperative ABS is malfunctioning. This means that ESP®, Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems may be unavailable. ÷ System Inoperative ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer working when braking. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Check that the brake lamps are working. If the brake lamps are not working: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake lamps are working: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 121

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 132 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Hill Start Assist Inoperative The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Hill start assist is malfunctioning. If you release the brake, your vehicle will not be held automatically when pulling away uphill and may roll away immediately. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 122 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 133 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ^ Distance Warning Inoperative The distance warning function is temporarily inoperative. Pos- sible causes are: Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. The distance warning function is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Clean the smart logo in the radiator trim (Y page 158). X Restart the engine. ^ Electronics Mal‐ function Visit Work‐ shop The distance warning function is malfunctioning or temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warning function is operational again. If the display message continues to light up, the electronics of the distance warning function are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 123

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 134 · Applies to: 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; Reduced Power See Operator's Manual The engine is running in emergency mode. For example, the fuel injection may be faulty. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. í Malfunction Visit Workshop The battery monitoring is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. í Stop See Operator's Manual The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 5 Stop Switch Off Engine The oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Check the oil level (Y page 150). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 150). Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 124 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 135 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? Stop Switch Off Engine The coolant temperature has exceeded 230 ‡ (110 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the notes as you do so (Y page 210). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 230 ‡ (110 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. 6 Low Fuel Level The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. ® Gas Cap Loose The pressure in the fuel system has dropped. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 125

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driving systems

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 136 · Applies to: 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions V Cruise Control Inop‐ erative The V symbol in the display footer also flashes for approx- imately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden. Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Warning Tire Fail‐ ure Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following haz- ards: RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. RYou could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 161). h Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Restart the tire pressure monitor after a wheel change (Y page 185) The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 126 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 137 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative Wheel Sensors Miss‐ ing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. or X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. or X Restart the tire pressure monitor after a wheel change (Y page 185) The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. h Correct Tire Pres‐ sure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 183). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 185). Display messages 127

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 138 · Applies to: 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b Brake Lights Inoper‐ ative The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the bulbs/ LEDs are faulty. G WARNING Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when braking. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Switch Off Lights The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to à or $. \ (Example of all doors and tailgate open) A door or the tailgate is open. A warning tone also sounds. The display shows the open doors/tailgate. X Pull over paying attention to road and traffic conditions and stop the vehicle, then close the doors and tailgate. D Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual The power steering is malfunctioning. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not continue driving. Con- tact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. D Electronics Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual The power steering assistance may be malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer. X Drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop and have the steering checked immediately. A Parking Lock Mal‐ function To Park: Apply Parking Brake Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A warning tone also sounds. The parking lock is malfunctioning. X Apply the parking brake to park. 128 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 139 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To Start Engine: Shift to P or N Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the display. You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position D or R. X Shift to P or N to start. To Start Engine: Shift to N. Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the display. The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion. X Shift to N to start. A To Start Engine: Apply Brake Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N is shown in the middle of the display. You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Vehicles with automatic transmission only: a warning tone also sounds. The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is in position R, N or D. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Fully close the driver's door. S Transmission Mal‐ function Visit Work‐ shop Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S is shown. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. SorB/ 7/C/ A Clutch Protection Active See Opera‐ tor's Manual Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes alter- nately with the currently selected transmission position. The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will feel the clutch pedal pulsate. X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling maneuvers. The automatic transmission is available again when the display message goes out. Display messages 129

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 140 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions SorB/ 7/C/ A Transmission Over‐ heated See Opera‐ tor's Manual Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position. A warning tone also sounds. Further pulling away or crawling maneuvers have led to a critical clutch temperature. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message does not reappear after acknowledging it. Electronics Mal‐ function Visit Work‐ shop In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key Ryou can no longer start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Electronics Mal‐ function Visit Work‐ shop The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the neutral sensor is faulty. Cruise control is automatically deactivated. Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. + Remove key The key is in the ignition lock, the engine is switched off and the driver's door is open. X Remove the SmartKey. Rain and Light Sen‐ sor Inoperative The rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. Automatic headlamp mode and automatic intermittent wipe are not available. X Switch on exterior lighting manually if required (Y page 67). X Switch the windshield wipers on or off manually as required (Y page 74). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 130 Display messages

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 141 · Applies to: 453

Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec- onds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. An additional warning tone will sound if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 31). The warning tone ceases. ü After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 31). The warning lamp goes out. ü The red seat belt warn- ing lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 12 mph (20 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 31). The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 131

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety systems

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 142 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The red restraint sys- tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 29). $ (USA only) J (Canada only) ÷ ! The red brake system warning lamp, the yel- low ESP® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp light up while the engine is running. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. You are driving with the parking brake engaged. X Release the parking brake. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. 132 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 143 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) J (Canada only) The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal- function. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Other driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 133

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 144 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. This means that ESP®, Crosswind Assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Other driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems may be unavailable. ÷ The yellow ESP® warn- ing lamp is on when you are driving. In addition, the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. h, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key Ryou can no longer start the engine. X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ The yellow ESP® warn- ing lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control is automatically deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi- tions. 134 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 145 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ The yellow ESP® warn- ing lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer working when braking. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Check that the brake lamps are working. If the brake lamps are not working: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake lamps are working: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ^ The yellow distance warning function warn- ing lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key Ryou can no longer start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 135

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 146 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ^ The yellow distance warning function warn- ing lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. The distance warning function is malfunctioning or temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warning function is operational again. If the distance warning lamp continues to light up, the distance warning function electronics are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. · The red distance warn- ing lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 48). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow Check Engine warning lamp flashes while the engine is running. The ignition system is malfunctioning. The engine is misfiring, for example, which means the catalytic converter could become damaged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. ; The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The engine power output is also reduced. The engine is running in emergency mode. This may lead to a mal- functioning of the fuel injection system, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 136 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 147 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the exhaust system Rin the fuel system Rwith the accelerator pedal sensor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. í The red battery warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Rthe battery is faulty Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 137

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 148 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 5 The red oil pressure indicator lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The engine oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine dam- age. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Check the oil level (Y page 150). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 150). Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ? The red coolant tem- perature warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 230 ‡ (110 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the notes as you do so (Y page 210). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 230 ‡ (110 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. 138 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tires

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 149 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h You are driving and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key Ryou can no longer start the engine. X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h You are driving and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. A warning tone also sounds. The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following haz- ards: RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 161). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 139

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 150 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tire pres- sure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately 1 minute and then remains lit. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. or X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. or X Restart the tire pressure monitor after a wheel change (Y page 185) The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. If the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp continues to remain on: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. h You are driving and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 183). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 185). 140 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 151 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions \ The red door warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. In addition, further warning lamps light up, such as ÷. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key Ryou can no longer start the engine. X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv- ing under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \ The red door warning lamp is on. A door or the tailgate is open. If you are driving at speeds above 13 mph (20 km/h), an additional warning tone will sound. X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Close all doors and the tailgate. D The yellow power steer- ing warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. G WARNING You may need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the display. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 141

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 152 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. Your vehicle has not been approved by the manufacturer for towing a trailer. A trailer could seriously impair driving safety. Mounting a basic rack, a cycle rack or a ski/ snowboard rack on the rear of the vehicle will change the axle load distribution as speci- fied by the vehicle manufacturer. Read the operating instructions for the individual accessories. The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- cle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occu- pants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pil- lar of the driver's door Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the head restraints Rensure that no items of luggage can enter the vehicle interior above or between the front seats Rensure that loaded objects are stowed safely and are secured Rload heavy objects at the bottom and light objects at the top Stowage space Important safety notes G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of brak- ing or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude from the stowage compartments or stowage nets. 142 Stowage areas

Stowage and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RAll closable stowage compartments

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 153 · Applies to: 453

should be closed before beginning your

journey.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile objects or

objects which are too large behind the

last bench seat or under the passenger

seats.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 142).

Glove box

X To open: pull handle :.

The glove box can be locked with the Smart-

Key.

X To lock: insert the SmartKey into the lock

and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.

X To unlock: insert the SmartKey into the lock

and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to posi-

tion 1.

Stowage compartment in the doors

The stowage compartments are located in the

driver's door and front-passenger door.

Stowage compartment Bottles can be stowed in the doors. Drawer in the center console X Pull drawer ; by handle : in the direc- tion of the arrow. Additional stowage areas RBracket on the front-passenger seat for a tablet, such as an iPad Air® RStowage net in front-passenger footwell Stowage compartment in the tailgate The stowage compartment in the tailgate offers additional stowage space for small objects. You can keep the fluorescent jacket, first-aid kit and warning triangle here, for example. Stowage areas 143

Stowage and features. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To open: open the tailgate.

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 154 · Applies to: 453

X Pull back handle : on the inside of the tailgate. X Fold the lid of the stowage compartment forwards in the direction of the arrow. X To close: fold the lid of the stowage com- partment back in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Press the cover firmly closed in the middle until it engages audibly. Cargo compartment cover Important safety notes G WARNING The trunk cover alone cannot retain or secure any heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You may be struck by unse- cured loads in the event of sudden changes in direction, braking or an accident. There is a risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Secure objects, luggage or loads by, for example, lashing them down to prevent them from slipping or tipping over, even if you use the trunk cover. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 142). The trunk cover: Rconceals objects in the vehicle's trunk Rprevents smaller objects from slipping from the trunk into the vehicle interior, but will not restrain loads in the event of an accident The luggage net bag: Rserves to hold small, light objects Rprevents smaller objects from slipping within the vehicle interior Fitting If you use the trunk cover under normal cir- cumstances, install it in brackets ;. If you do not need to use the trunk cover, installit in brackets =. X For easier fitting, fold the front- passenger seat backrests forwards (Y page 63). X Open the upper and lower tailgate (Y page 57). X Hold trunk cover : in the trunk with the luggage net bag at the front. X Insert the trunk cover into upper bracket ; or into lower bracket = on the right-hand side. i Lower bracket = can only be used if there is no subwoofer fitted. 144 Stowage areas

Stowage and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Slide handle ? to the right in the direc-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 155 · Applies to: 453

tion of the arrow. X Insert the trunk cover into bracket ; or = on the left side paneling and release the handle. Trunk cover : snaps into place. X Pull luggage net bag A down slightly and secure with the Velcro fasteners. To remove, follow the sequence in reverse. Installing and removing the trunk cover X To install: grip trunk cover : in the mid- dle and pull it back. X Hook trunk cover : into left and right rear brackets B and release. X To remove: grip trunk cover : in the mid- dle, pull it back and unhook it from rear brackets B. X Slide trunk cover : back. Fitting/removing the subwoofer X To fit: insert connector :. X Place subwoofer ; on the side trim. X Slide subwoofer ; to bracket =. X Slide the subwoofer up in the direction of the arrow on bracket =. X Then slide the subwoofer over bracket = in the direction of the arrow until the sub- woofer slides down. X Close quick-release fastener ?. X To remove: release quick-release fas- tener ?. X Slide the subwoofer up over bracket = and remove. Stowage areas 145

Stowage and features. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Disconnect plug :.

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 156 · Applies to: 453

X Take out subwoofer :.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNING

The cup holder cannot hold a container

secure whilst traveling. If you use a cup

holder whilst traveling, the container may

be flung around and liquid may be spilled.

The vehicle occupants may come into con-

tact with the liquid and if it is hot, they

may be scalded. You may be distracted from

the traffic conditions and you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident and injury.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is

stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-

tainers of the right size. Always close the

container, particularly if the liquid is

hot.

G WARNING

If you transport objects in the vehicle

interior and these are not adequately

secured, they could slip or be flung around

and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In

addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces

and mobile phone brackets may not always

be able to hold the objects placed in them

in the event of an accident. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sharp

braking or sudden changes of direction.

RAlways stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be tossed about in these or

similar situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage

nets or stowage nets.

REnsure that closable stowage spaces are

shut before beginning your journey.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large

objects in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The

drinks could otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 142).

Cup holder in the front-compartment

center console

Cup holder

Cup holder in the center console

Cup holder The cup holder has a recess for storing selec- ted mobile phones. 146 Features

Stowage and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Sun visors

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 157 · Applies to: 453

Overview

G WARNING

If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is

folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you

could be blinded by incident light. There

is a risk of an accident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded down

while driving.

Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull the sun visor out of bracket ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. Ashtray ! The cup holder in the center console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- aged. X To open: lift up cover :. X To close: push down cover :. X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out. X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup holder. i If you remove the ashtray, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. 12 V sockets General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 87). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 120 W (10 A). Example acces- sories include mobile phone chargers. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. Socket in the front-compartment center console X Lift up the cover of socket :. Features 147

Stowage and features. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Floormat on the driver's side

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 158 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To install: place the floormat in the foot- well. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain- ers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retain- ers ;. X Remove the floormat. 148 Features

Stowage and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 159 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Checking service products Engine compartment (rear) Engine compartment cover G WARNING The engine compartment cover may become very hot. If you remove the cover to do work on the engine compartment, there is a risk of injury! Allow the engine to cool down and then remove the engine compartment cover after cooling has taken place. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the engine compartment cover has not been installed correctly, when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before remov- ing the engine compartment cover. Make sure that the engine compartment cover has been installed correctly. X To open: apply the parking brake. X Select a gear. X Switch the ignition off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Open the upper and lower tailgate (Y page 57). X For vehicles with the subwoofer: remove the subwoofer (Y page 149). X Remove luggage compartment cover : if necessary (Y page 144). X Hold the carpet on the right and left sides and fold upwards. X Vehicles with a trunk cover: attach the hook to upper bracket of trunk cover : (Y page 144). X Unscrew screws = from engine compart- ment cover ; manually. X Remove engine compartment cover ;. X To close: slide engine compartment cover ; forward as far as it will go. X Retighten screws = manually. X Vehicles with a trunk cover: unhook the hooks. X Put the carpet back into the vehicle. X Fold down the carpet and push it under the side paneling. X For vehicles with the subwoofer: fit the subwoofer again (Y page 149). X Close the tailgate. Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.55 US qt (0.5 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Checking service products 149

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When checking the oil level:

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 160 · Applies to: 453

Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately 5 minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the meas- urement Checking the oil level using the oil dip- stick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts X Open the engine compartment cover (Y page 149). Example X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. 150 Checking service products

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Environmental note

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 161 · Applies to: 453

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. You will find further information on engine oils you can use in the "Technical data" sec- tion (Y page 209). X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up once with a max- imum of 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- stick (Y page 150). Front compartment Service cover Important safety notes G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before every journey. G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to operate while the service cover is open, there is a danger of injury from the wiper arms. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the ser- vice cover. ! To ensure unhindered air intake, care- fully remove any snow or dirt from the ven- tilation slots above the service cover. To prevent it from becoming damaged or dirty, the service cover can be removed and hung on the front of the vehicle. The service cover is attached to the rear side of the vehicle body with a strap. X Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface. X Apply the parking brake. X Select a gear. X Switch the ignition off. Removing X To unlock: remove lock cover : (driver's side only) with the key. X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position u. Checking service products 151

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Pull both levers : with both index fingers

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 162 · Applies to: 453

in the direction of the arrows. X First pull both levers ; forwards and then completely out. X Lift service cover = and pull forwards. X Hook service cover = at the top rear in the openings on the vehicle. Inserting X Lift service cover =. X Slide bars ? on the left and right of the service cover under the bars on fender. X Press service cover = down in the direc- tion of the arrow. X Slide both levers ; in and then back. X Press lever ; in the radiator trim and allow it to engage. X To lock: insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. Insert lock cover : flush (on the driver's side) and clip it into place. 152 Checking service products

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Coolant

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 163 · Applies to: 453

Important safety notes G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, partic- ularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure. Checking the coolant The coolant expansion tank is in the area under the service cover. X Open the service cover (Y page 151). X Let the coolant cool down for at least 30 minutes. X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehi- cle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Check the reservoir visually. The fluid level must be between MIN and MAX. Adding coolant X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Slowly turn cover cap : anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. X Do not exceed the maximum filling level when adding coolant. X Screw on cap : tightly. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 210). Windshield washer system G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components in the front compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. X Open the service cover (Y page 151). X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: if available, push the removable nozzle down and push it inside. X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 211). Maintenance Service display Service message The service display informs you of the next service due date. Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. Maintenance 153

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Information on the type of service and ser-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 164 · Applies to: 453

vice intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). For further information inquire at any smart center or look under http://www.smartUSA.com (only USA). i The service display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 150). Whenever a service is due, this is shown approximately 30 days or 1500 km (1000 miles) beforehand. After starting the engine, a ser- vice message appears in the instrument clus- ter display for a few seconds; see the follow- ing example. Next Service in .. Days together with the ¯ or ° symbol. If the service due date has been exceeded, Service Due .. Days Ago. The symbol shows the type of service. ¯ stands for a minor service and ° for a major service. The service display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date in the ser- vice display before disconnecting the bat- tery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. Calling up the service display X Switch on the ignition. X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Messages and Ser‐ vice menu. The service display shows when the service is due. Information about Service Resetting the service display ! Have service work carried out as descri- bed in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and dam- age to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart center, will reset the service interval dis- play after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent inter- mediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous ter- rain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart center. Driving abroad An extensive smart service network is also available in other countries. For further information inquire at any smart center. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. 154 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 165 · Applies to: 453

of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, partic- ularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents rec- ommended and approved by smart. Exterior care Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after wash- ing the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows are fully closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at posi- tion 0 The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each coun- try. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by smart. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exte- rior damage to the tires or chassis compo- nents. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Care 155

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not use power washers with circular jet

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 166 · Applies to: 453

nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. The following cannot always be completely repaired: Rscratches Rcorrosive deposits Rareas affected by corrosion Rdamage caused by inadequate care In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. When water no longer forms beads on the paint surface, use the care product Paint Care, which has been approved by smart. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paintwork has become dull, then the paintwork should be cleaned. Use the care product Paint Care, which has been approved by smart to clean the paintwork. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, mottled areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. 156 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i The vehicle should preferably be washed

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 167 · Applies to: 453

by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved smart care products. Cleaning the panoramic roof ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic windows of the panoramic roof. Do not use cleaning agents which contain solvents. X Clean the plastic panes of the panoramic roof using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. smart car shampoo, a commer- cially available glass cleaner or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exte- rior damage to the tires or chassis compo- nents. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, partic- ularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the wind- shield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- shield or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstan- ces prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by smart. Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING You could become trapped by the wind- shield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- shield or wiper blades. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Care 157

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 168 · Applies to: 453

the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. smart car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehi- cle and the power washer nozzle. Informa- tion about the correct distance is availa- ble from the equipment manufacturer. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the exhaust pipe Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by smart. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepar- able damage to the display. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commer- cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/ LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- fiber cloth. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents contain- ing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. 158 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Do not affix the following to plastic sur-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 169 · Applies to: 453

faces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high- quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint- free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care products and clean- ing agents recommended and approved by smart. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recom- mended and approved by smart. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: RDifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury RSlight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- ers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been recommended by smart. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution contain- ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq- uid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution contain- ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq- uid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu- tion. Care 159

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cleaning the roof lining and carpets

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 170 · Applies to: 453

X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended and approved by smart. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean- ing agents recommended and approved by smart. 160 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 171 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all

models and all standard and optional

equipment of your vehicle available at the

time of publication of the Operator's Man-

ual. Country-specific differences are pos-

sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may

not feature all functions described here.

This also applies to safety-relevant sys-

tems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified spe-

cialist workshops: (Y page 20).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

The TIREFIT kit and the towing eye are located

in the stowage well under the front-passenger

footwell.

X Unscrew wing nuts :.

X Remove the vehicle tool tray.

Towing eye ; Tire sealant filler bottle = Tire inflation compressor Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with a TIREFIT kit (Y page 161). Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 197). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they get out of the vehicle. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Any- one who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem- peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). Flat tire 161

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 172 · Applies to: 453

In the following situations, the tire seal- ant is unable to provide sufficient break- down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irri- tation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire seal- ant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vom- iting, and seek medical attention imme- diately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tire inflation com- pressor for longer than 15 minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be oper- ated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire infla- tion compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor from the front- passenger footwell (Y page 161). X Affix the 50 mph (80 km/h) maximum speed sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Unwind plug : with the cable from the tire inflation compressor ;. X Remove hose A from the bottom section of tire inflation compressor housing ;. X Remove cap on tire sealant bottle ? and connect hose A. X Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty tire. X Remove cap on filler hose = and screw filler hose = onto the valve. X Insert connector : into the 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 147). 162 Flat tire

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 173 · Applies to: 453

lock (Y page 87). X Press on/off switch B on tire inflation compressor ; to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation com- pressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of 15 minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) is achieved after a maximum of 15 minutes, see "Tire pressure is achieved" (Y page 163). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after a maximum of 15 minutes, see "Tire pressure is not ach- ieved" (Y page 163). i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after a maximum of 10 minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of 10 minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. Tire pressure reached G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The 50 mph (80 km/h) maximum speed sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. ! After use, excess tire sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after 10 minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately 2 miles (3 km) and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Flat tire 163

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 174 · Applies to: 453

If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). For values, see the tire and loading information table on the driver's side B-pillar. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres- sure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X If the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- shop. Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steeringmaneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Further information about ABS (Y page 47) and esp® (Y page 49). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the cre- ation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing elec- trostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump- starting. 164 Battery (vehicle)

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 175 · Applies to: 453

tery is electrostatically charged. There is a build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery pro- duces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explo- sion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immedi- ately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain danger- ous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be col- lected separately and recy- cled to protect the envi- ronment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified special- ist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- tem may be damaged. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take pro- tective measures when handling batteries. WARNING Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat- tery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery (vehicle) 165

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 176 · Applies to: 453

tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- guard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physi- cian if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occu- pants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an acci- dent. In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- mum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery dis- connected at a qualified specialist work- shop. To maintain the charge, you can also charge the battery with a charger recommen- ded by smart. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery charge status checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. When replacing a battery, only use a battery recommended by smart. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehi- cle and do not require any electrical con- sumers. The vehicle will then use very lit- tle energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explo- sive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, cre- ating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immedi- ately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temper- atures below freezing point. When jump- starting the vehicle or charging the bat- tery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. X Open the service cover (Y page 151). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 168). If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/ warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the dis- charged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The start- ing characteristics can be impaired, partic- ularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed- out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 166 Battery (vehicle)

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Only charge the fitted battery with a battery

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 177 · Applies to: 453

charger which has been tested and approved by smart. A battery charger specially adapted for smart vehicles, and tested and approved by smart, is available as an accessory. It per- mits the charging of the battery in its instal- led position. Contact a smart center for fur- ther information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Battery (vehicle) 167

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Jump-starting

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 178 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is suffi- cient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when con- necting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are con- nected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis- connecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 168 Jump-starting

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 179 · Applies to: 453

the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThebattery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start con- nected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jumper cables are not damaged. RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the wiper rods or the fan. X Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the service cover. Position number A identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. X Remove the protective cover from positive terminal :. X Connect positive terminal : on your battery to positive terminal ; of donor battery A using the jump lead. beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to negative terminal ? of your battery using the jump lead. Connect the jump lead to donor battery A first. Jump-starting 169

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Start the engine.

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 180 · Applies to: 453

X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First disconnect the jump lead from negative terminal ? and negative terminal = and then from positive terminal : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Attach the protective cover to positive terminal :. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running Rthe brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the power sup- ply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehi- cle and its weight is greater than the per- missible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehi- cle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehi- cle. Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 205). ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Drive slowly and smoothly when towing. Excessive tractive power could otherwise damage the vehicles. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. 170 Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

It is better to have the vehicle transported

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 181 · Applies to: 453

than to have it towed. Vehicles with automatic transmission: when towing a vehicle, the transmission must be in position N. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 55). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: Do not tow away the vehicle with the basic carrier fitted. Do not secure the tow cable or tow bar to the basic carrier. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye X Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. The towing eye is located in the vehicle tool kit stowage compartment in the front- passenger footwell (Y page 161). X Carefully prise out cover : using a suit- able tool, e.g. a plastic wedge. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop and tighten it. Removing the towing eye X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Position top of cover : in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit stowage compartment in the front- passenger footwell (Y page 161). Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 170). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could other- wise damage the brake system. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 69). X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion P. or X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground i In order to signal a change of direction when towing with the hazard warning lamps Towing and tow-starting 171

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

switched on, use the combination switch as

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 182 · Applies to: 453

usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion N. Vehicles with manual transmission: X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 69). It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 170). Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 87). X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Shift the transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. Tow-starting (emergency engine start- ing) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-start- ing" at (Y page 168). Before tow-starting: Rthe battery must be connected Rthe engine must be cold Rthe exhaust system has cooled down. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 69). X Install the towing eye (Y page 171). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec- ond gear and keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X When the engine is started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away with the parking brake. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. 172 Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Remove the towing eye (Y page 171).

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 183 · Applies to: 453

X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the speci- fied new fuses having the correct amper- age. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for smart vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Oth- erwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the com- ponents on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 175). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before changing a fuse X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 100). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 87). All indica- tor lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the front area RFuse box in the glove compartment Fuse box in the front area Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 173). G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to operate while the service cover is open, there is a danger of injury from the wiper arms. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the ser- vice cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the service cover (Y page 151). You can now see fuse box :. Fuse box in the glove compartment Fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- board. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture Fuses 173

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 184 · Applies to: 453

the operation of the fuses. X Open the driver's door. X Open the glove box. X To open: open cover : in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it engages. X Close the glove box. 174 Fuses

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fuse allocation

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 185 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Color coding 1 Starter motor 5 A Brown 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown 3 Lighting control unit 5 A Brown 4 Air bag 5 A Brown 5 ‑ ‑ ‑ 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue 8 Control unit power supply 10 A Red 9 Control unit power supply 10 A Red 10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow 11 Turn signals 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 14 Power windows (anti-entrapment feature) 30 A Green 15 ESP® 5 A Brown 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobilizer 3 A Violet 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Parking aid, headlamp settings 15 A Blue Fuses 175

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Consumer

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 186 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Color coding 21 Engine control unit 5 A Brown 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 Starter motor 30 A Green 24 Central locking 40 A Orange 25 Front windshield wiper 30 A Green 26 Radio 20 A Yellow 27 ‑ ‑ ‑ 28 12 V socket 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown 30 Horn 15 A Blue 31 ‑ ‑ ‑ 32 Central locking 15 A Blue 33 Tail lamps, front fog lamps, hazard warning lamp button, locking button, power windows, license plate lighting, radio, control unit for air-con- ditioning system, cruise control, parking aid button, program selector button, tailgate unlock- ing 25 A Cyan 34 Headlamps, daytime running lamps 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime running lamps 25 A Cyan 36 ‑ ‑ ‑ 37 ‑ ‑ ‑ 38 ‑ ‑ ‑ 39 ‑ ‑ ‑ 40 ‑ ‑ ‑ 41 ‑ ‑ ‑ 42 ‑ ‑ ‑ 43 Exterior mirror heating 5 A Brown 44 Anti-entrapment feature 25 A Cyan 45 Transmission control unit 5 A Brown 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow 47 ‑ ‑ ‑ 48 ‑ ‑ ‑ 49 ‑ ‑ ‑ 176 Fuses

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 187 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the orig- inal part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel G Warning A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. do not drive with a flat tire. Immediately replace the flat tire with your spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by smart or that are not being used correctly can impair driving safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Information on dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle (Y page 200). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the tire and loading information table on the driver's side B-pillar Runder "tire pressure" (Y page 180) i Further information on wheels and tires can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving RCheck the tire pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust before beginning your journey. RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteris- tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are dam- aged. If you suspect that a tire is defec- tive, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar eleva- tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. Operation 177

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Regular checking of wheels and tires

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 188 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of dam- age and replace any damaged tires imme- diately. Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage, at least once a month, as well as after driving on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures in the tires Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 178). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the stand- ard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by smart. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure mon- itoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 180). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered Notes on tire profile G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dis- sipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increa- ses, in particular where speed is not adap- ted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the mini- mum tire tread depth is reached. Indicator : shows which position the bar marking (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tire. ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. 178 Operation

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RAfter fitting new tires, run them in at mod-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 189 · Applies to: 453

erate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km), as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- est, regardless of wear. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a quali- fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- ter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 196). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tires perma- nently. smart cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of dam- age and replace any damaged tires imme- diately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient trac- tion. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †) use winter tires marked with M+S. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- vide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driv- ing safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- teristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for smart. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for smart. Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are fitted corre- sponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 180). X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 185). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. Winter operation 179

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 190 · Applies to: 453

snow chains on steel wheels, you may dam-

age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from

the relevant wheels before mounting the

snow chains.

smart recommends that you only use snow

chains that have been specially approved for

smart. For more information, please contact

the smart center or a qualified specialist

workshop.

Bear in mind that snow chains are designed

for a certain wheel size. If you mount tires

that are larger or smaller than the original

tires, you will require new snow chains of the

correct size.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please

bear the following points in mind:

RSnow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Permissible

wheel-tire combinations (Y page 200).

ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads

completely covered by snow. Remove the

snow chains as soon as possible when you

come to a road that is not snow-covered.

RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-

ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.

Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose

the following risks:

Rthe tires may burst, especially as the

load and vehicle speed increase.

Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tire

traction.

Rthe driving characteristics, as well as

steering and braking, may be greatly

impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Follow recommended tire inflation pres-

sures and check the pressure of all the tires

including the spare wheel:

Rmonthly, at least

Rif the load changes

Rbefore beginning a long journey

Runder different operating conditions,

e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The specifications on the sample Tire and

Loading Information placard and tire pres-

sure tables are examples. Tire pressure spec-

ifications are vehicle-specific and may

deviate from the data shown here. The tire

pressure specifications that are valid for

your vehicle can be found on the Tire and

Loading Information placard and tire pres-

sure table on the vehicle.

The recommended tire pressures for the tires

mounted at the factory can be found on the

labels described here.

Further information on tire pressures can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 185). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. 180 Tire pressure

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Example: tire pressure table for all tires per-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 191 · Applies to: 453

mitted for this vehicle by the factory The tire pressure table contains the recom- mended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Example: tire pressure table with tire dimen- sions If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 191). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, whichcan cause tire pres- sure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tire pressure 181

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 192 · Applies to: 453

tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire

does not permit any reliable conclusion

about the tire pressure. On vehicles equip-

ped with the electronic tire pressure moni-

tor, the tire pressure can be checked in the

on-board computer.

The tire temperature and pressure increase

when the vehicle is in motion. This is

dependent on the driving speed and the load.

Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-

sures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

Rif the vehicle has been parked with the

tires out of direct sunlight for at least

three hours and

Rif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on

the outside temperature, the vehicle speed

and the tire load. If the tire temperature

changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure

changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking

the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the

tire pressure if it is too low for the current

operating conditions. If you check the tire

pressure when the tires are warm, the result-

ing value will be higher than if the tires were

cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire

pressure to the value specified for cold

tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be

too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires:

Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac-

ard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler

flap (Y page 98).

Underinflated or overinflated tires

G WARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can

overheat and burst as a consequence. In

addition, they also suffer from excessive

and/or irregular wear, which can severely

impair the braking properties and the

driving characteristics. There is a risk of

an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all

the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires

Underinflated tires may:

Roverheat, leading to tire defects

Radversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly

Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

G WARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can

burst because they are damaged more easily

by road debris, potholes etc. In addition,

they also suffer from irregular wear, which

can severely impair the braking properties

and the driving characteristics. There is a

risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all

the tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires

Overinflated tires may:

Rincrease the braking distance

Radversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly

Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort

Rbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

Example: maximum permissible tire pressure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the rec- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 180). 182 Tire pressure

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 193 · Applies to: 453

specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 180). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 98) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pres- sure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 180). X If the tire pressure is too low increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do this, press down the metal pin in the valve using the tip of a pen, for exam- ple. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure monitor General notes i This function is only available in the USA. If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the cor- responding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provi- ded), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle man- ufacturer on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indi- cated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure moni- toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driv- ing on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping abil- ity. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub- stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinfla- tion has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the Tire pressure 183

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

warning lamp will flash for approximately

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 194 · Applies to: 453

a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repea- ted every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- function indicator is illuminated, the sys- tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating sit- uation (Y page 180). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warn- ing message is aligned to the reference val- ues taught-in. Restart the tire pressure mon- itor after adjusting to the cold tire pressure. The current pressures are saved as new ref- erence values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops sig- nificantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 180). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indi- cating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunction- ing: RIf the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is sig- nificantly too low. The tire pressure mon- itor is not malfunctioning. RIf the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. i A message appears in the display in addi- tion to the warning lamp. Observe the information on display mes- sages (Y page 126). If the tire pressure monitor is malfunction- ing, it may take up to ten minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction. The malfunction will be indi- cated first by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio head- phones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pres- sure loss in one or more tires, a warning mes- sage is shown in the display. The yellow warn- ing light in the tire pressure monitor lights up. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds. RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. Correct the tire pressure at the next opportunity. RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Failure message appears in the display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes for the display messages in the "Tires" section 184 Tire pressure

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

(Y page 126) and the indicator and warning

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 195 · Applies to: 453

lamps in the instrument cluster in the "Tires" section (Y page 139). Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will auto- matically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pres- sure monitor then monitors the new tire pres- sure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- mended for the corresponding driving sit- uation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 180). Additional tire pressure values for dif- ferent loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 180). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. On-board computer with a color display X To restart the tire pressure monitor: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to con- firm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Tire Pressure Monitor submenu and con- firm with a. The Tire Pressure Monitor Use Cur‐ rent Pressures As New Reference Val‐ ues? message appears in the display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the 9 or : button to select yes and press the a button to confirm. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message appears in the display. X Press a to confirm. After a short while, the message is also hidden without pressing the a button. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as refer- ence values and monitored. i If the Tire Pressure Monitor Restar‐ ted message does not appear after approx- imately 5 seconds, the restart was not suc- cessful. If this occurs, repeat the restart. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the 9 or : button to select no and press the a button to confirm. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information plac- ard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also con- Loading the vehicle 185

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

tains details of the tire sizes and corre-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 196 · Applies to: 453

sponding pressures for tires mounted at

the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on

the B-pillar on the driver's side. The

vehicle identification plate informs you

of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is

made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle

occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can

also find information about the maximum

gross axle weight rating on the front and

rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is

the maximum weight that can be carried

by one axle (front or rear axle). Never

exceed the maximum load or the maximum

gross axle weight rating for the front or

rear axle.

B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the speci- fied value. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illus- tration are examples. The maximum per- missible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Number of seats Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illus- tration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load- ing Information placard. Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never 186 Loading the vehicle

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 197 · Applies to: 453

Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be rid- ing in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example: at a sum “XXX” of 1400 lbs and five occupants each weighing 150 lbs, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capa- city calculated in step 4. Loading the vehicle 187

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Example: steps 1 to 3

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 198 · Applies to: 453

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 185). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) 188 Loading the vehicle

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Step 3

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 199 · Applies to: 453

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Permissible load (max- imum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg) = 960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 185). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehi- cle weight. Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per- missible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- cle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their pur- pose is to provide drivers with uniform reli- able information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Can- ada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applica- ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All about wheels and tires 189

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

All passenger car tires must conform to the

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 200 · Applies to: 453

statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfa- ces. You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. smart recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 178). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfa- ces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 179). Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load- ing, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and pos- sible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- sipate heat when tested under controlled con- ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 190 All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tire labeling

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 201 · Applies to: 453

Overview of tire labeling

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard

(Y page 194)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Y page 193)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 193)

? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 182)

A Manufacturer

B Tire material (Y page 194)

C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating (Y page 191)

D Load index (Y page 193)

E Tire name

The markings described above are on the tire

in addition to the tire name (sales designa-

tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may

deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating

G WARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing

capacity and the approved maximum speed

could lead to tire damage or the tire burst-

ing. There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe

the tire load rating and speed rating

required for your vehicle.

Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code ? Rim diameter A Load bearing index B Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to Euro- pean manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. man- ufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" repre- sents diagonal tires; "B" represents diago- nal radial tires. All about wheels and tires 191

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 202 · Applies to: 453

over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufac- turer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam- eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maxi- mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permis- sible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 185). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 193). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 193). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic con- ditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Index Speed rating ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manu- facturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service speci- fication must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking pro- vide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, win- ter tires also have the i snowflake sym- bol on the tire wall. Tires with this mark- ing fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the 2 Or M+S i for winter tires. 192 All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 203 · Applies to: 453

regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac- tory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 200). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified special- ist workshop. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, load rating : may also be imprinted on the side- wall of the tire. This is located after the let- ters that identify the speed rating (Y page 191). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating Maximum tire load : is the maximum per- missible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permis- sible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 185). i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S tire regulations prescribe that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identi- fication code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. All about wheels and tires 193

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 204 · Applies to: 453

symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufac- turer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 200). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire characteristics This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the United States Department of Transporta- tion. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire trac- tion and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recom- mended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehi- cle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. 194 All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 205 · Applies to: 453

Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identi- fication. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug- gage and the drawbar noseweight, if appli- cable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occu- pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose- weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva- lent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side- wall of the tire. This specifies the load- bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-con- ditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum load rating is the maximum per- missible weight in kilograms or pounds for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) All about wheels and tires 195

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tread

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 206 · Applies to: 453

The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms). These optional extras, such as high-perform- ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus iden- tify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Flat tire You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section (Y page 161). Rotating the wheels G WARNING Never interchange the front and rear wheels as they have different dimensions, e.g. size, wheel offset etc. Otherwise, there could be a negative effect on the road hold- ing and you could endanger yourself or oth- ers. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the elec- tronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Various types of steel wheel can be fitted on your vehicle. Some steel wheels have a red mark in the hub cap area. The hub cap has to be removed to see the red mark, see "Raising the vehicle" in the "Wheel change" section (Y page 197). When changing the wheels, always fit wheels of the same type on all axles. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 196). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating condi- tions. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac- tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary. 196 Changing a wheel

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Direction of rotation

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 207 · Applies to: 453

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are fitted corre- sponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle X Make sure that you have the appropriate tire-changing tools. For further informa- tion inquire at any smart center. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake (Y page 101). X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Also secure the vehicle against rolling away. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away X On level ground: place chocks or other suit- able items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Changing a wheel 197

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the following when raising the vehi-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 208 · Applies to: 453

cle: Rmake sure you have a suitable jack and wheel wrench. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. For further information inquire at any smart center. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for per- forming maintenance work under the vehi- cle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen- gage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). Rnever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate while the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Steel wheel with hub cap X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: carefully reach into two of the hub cap openings and remove the hub cap. Steel wheel with hub cap X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: remove the hub cap. X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- pletely. 198 Changing a wheel

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The vehicle may only be raised at the desig-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 209 · Applies to: 453

nated jacking points on the sill. The jacking points are located just behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and just in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels (arrows). You can identify the jacking points by the triangular indentations on the sill. To avoid damage, position the jack centrally under the triangular indentations. X Position jack ; centrally under the tri- angular indentations at the jacking points on the sill :. Example X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. X Raise the vehicle with jack ; until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 centimeters) off the ground. Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a quali- fied specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driv- ing. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec- tion (Y page 196). Only use wheel bolts that are designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for smart vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Changing a wheel 199

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 210 · Applies to: 453

faces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- ger-tight. Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. X Lower the vehicle until it is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts in the sequence indicated : to ?. Do this evenly in a crosswise pattern. The tightening torque must be 77 lb-ft (105 Nm). X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- ted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 180). i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors. Steel wheel with hub cap X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: fit hub cap A so that tire valve B is not trap- ped. X Press the hub cap A evenly onto the wheel with both hands. X Check to make sure the hub cap A is seated safely on the wheel. X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: fit the hub cap. Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been specifically approved by smart for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. Only use tires and wheels specifically tes- ted and approved by smart. Certain char- acteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may other- wise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, dimensional var- iations and different tire deformation characteristics could cause the tires to make contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. 200 Wheel and tire combinations

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

smart accepts no liability for damage

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 211 · Applies to: 453

resulting from the use of tires or wheels other than those tested and approved. Information on wheels and tires can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a smart center. ! Retreaded tires have not been tested by smart and are not recommended. Previous damage sustained by the tires (before the retreading process) cannot always be rec- ognized. As a result, smart cannot guaran- tee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are fitted. Overview of abbreviations used in the fol- lowing tire tables: RBA: both axles RFA: front axle RRA: rear axle The recommended pressures for various oper- ating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac- ard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pres- sures under various operating conditions (Y page 180). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte- nance recommendations of the tire manufac- turer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ right) Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at a given time (summer tires, winter tires) Exception: it is permissible to fit a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tire. i The following pages contain information on approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the fac- tory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you want to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, it may be necessary to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding size. The size of the approved winter tires may differ from the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop. i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. Wheel and tire combinations 201

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tires

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 212 · Applies to: 453

smart fortwo coupe 66 kW Turbo All-weather tires R 15 Tires Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+S RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+S Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 Wheel offset: 1.25 in (32 mm) RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH Wheel offset: 1.25 in (32 mm) RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) FA: 165/65 R15 81 H M+S RA: 185/60 R15 84 H M+S Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 Wheel offset: 1.25 in (32 mm) RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH Wheel offset: 1.25 in (32 mm) RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) R 16 Tires Wheels FA: 185/50 R16 81 H M+S RA: 205/45 R16 83 H M+S Light-alloy wheels: FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH Wheel offset: 1.57 in (40 mm) 202 Wheel and tire combinations

Wheels and tires. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Winter tires

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 213 · Applies to: 453

R 15 Tires Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 Wheel offset: 1.25 in (32 mm) RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH Wheel offset: 1.25 in (32 mm) RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) Wheel and tire combinations 203

Wheels and tires. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 214 · Applies to: 453

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Man- ual. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 20). Information regarding technical data General information i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Con- sult a smart center for the data for all vehi- cle variants and trim levels. Vehicle electronics Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from modi- fied or incorrectly retrofitted RF-trans- mitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incor- rectly operated RF transmitters can inter- fere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist work- shop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Rcompliance with the maximum permissi- ble output in these wavebands is required. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia- tion may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discus- sions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. The following antenna positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly instal- led: 204 Vehicle electronics

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Approved antenna positions

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 215 · Applies to: 453

Front roof area ; Rear roof area Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi- mum transmission outputs or antenna posi- tions must be approved by smart. i Damage or consequential damage arising from retrofitting RF transmitters in the vehicle, is not covered by the smart war- ranty. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum trans- mission output Tetra 380 - 410 MHz 20 W Mobile communications generation 2G/3G/4G 6 W The following can be used in the vehicle with- out restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis- sion output of up to 100 mW RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTetra RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G) Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; Vehicle model = Paint code Identification plates 205

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 216 · Applies to: 453

only)

; VIN

= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifi-

cation plate is used only as an example.

This data is different for every vehicle and

can deviate from the data shown here. You

can find the data applicable to your vehi-

cle on the vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-

most position.

X Fold up floor covering : in front of the

right-hand front seat.

You will see VIN ;.

The VIN can also be found in the following

locations:

Rat lower edge of the windshield :

Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 205)

Engine number

Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

Emissions control information plate 206 Identification plates

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Service products and filling capaci-

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 217 · Applies to: 453

ties Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, stor- age and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original contain- ers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of chil- dren. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use prod- ucts that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at a smart center. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- tion on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. i For further information inquire at any smart center. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or cloth- ing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vom- iting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Tank capacity Model Total capa- city All models 8.7 US gal (33.0 l) Service products and filling capacities 207

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Model

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 218 · Applies to: 453

Of which reserve All models Approx. 1.3 US gal (5.0 l) Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- fied specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea- ded gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON (91 octane). ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- tives. Engine failure may otherwise occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline must only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by smart (see "Additives"). For further information inquire at any smart center. ! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavail- able and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- lowing precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gas- oline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- tance. i For further information, consult a quali- fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.smartusa.com (USA only). i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower octane rating. Information on refueling (Y page 97). Additives ! Operating the engine with subsequently added fuel additives can lead to engine damage. Do not mix any fuel additives with the fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. Gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by smart. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. For further information on recom- mended additives, inquire at any smart center. smart recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a smart center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by smart. 208 Service products and filling capacities

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You must observe the notes and mixing ratios

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 219 · Applies to: 453

specified on the container. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci- entists believe to be principally respon- sible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road condi- tions or traffic flow You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis- sions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures Rin city traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement inter- vals than those prescribed. You could oth- erwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the impor- tant safety notes on service products (Y page 207). The engine oils are matched to the perform- ance of smart engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. Consult a smart center to view a list of approved engine oils and filters. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval All models 229.51, 229.53 i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- tainers. Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Capacity All models 3.8 US qt (3.4 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Service products and filling capacities 209

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine oil viscosity

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 220 · Applies to: 453

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscos- ity, this means that it is thick; a low viscos- ity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during oper- ation due to, for example, aging or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly rec- ommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Brake fluid When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 207). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist work- shop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant General notes ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 207). The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool- ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen- tration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50 %. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to around -13 ‡ (-25 †). Rnot exceed 50 % (antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ [-37 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. smart recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1 or 325.6. Antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for 210 Service products and filling capacities

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating Fluids 310.1 and 325.6 can be mixed

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 221 · Applies to: 453

together. An orange discoloration depending on the mixing ratio does not affect the func- tion. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- tion. i The coolant is checked with every main- tenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windshield washer system General notes ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 207). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- ture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- ture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Win- terFit. The correct mixing ratio can be taken from the information on the antifreeze protec- tion container. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrig- erant type used can be found on the left, on the underside of the hood. ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other- wise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. Always have work on the climate control sys- tem carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Refrigerant instruction label The refrigerant instruction label: Ris located at the front on the right on the body frame. Rinforms that service work is to be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Service products and filling capacities 211

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle data

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 222 · Applies to: 453

General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: RThe heights specified may vary as a result of: - Tires - Load - Condition of the suspension - Optional equipment ROptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. You can find the correct values for your model with the help of the VIN on the vehicle iden- tification plate (Y page 205). Dimensions and weights Model : Opening height All models 73.0 in (1855 mm) All models Vehicle length 106.1 in (2695 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 74.5 in (1893 mm) Vehicle width with- out exterior mir- rors 65.4 in (1663 mm) All models Vehicle height 61.2 in (1555 mm) Wheelbase 73.7 in (1873 mm) Turning radius 22.8 ft (6.95 m) Maximum trunk load 165 lb (75.0 kg) Maximum tailgate load 220 lb (100.0 kg) Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims 65.8 in (1672 mm). 212 Vehicle data

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Other ManualsLib Projects

Fortwo_453_2016_Operator_Manual_214p.pdf · p. 223 · Applies to: 453

www.manualslib.com www.manualslib.de www.manualslib.es www.manualslib.fr www.manualslib.nl www.manualslib.mx www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages